JP5977179B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the bonus winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination including the bonus combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). And, when the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery can be drawn within the range of the predetermined number of frames, the effective combination is arranged, and the winning combination not in the internal lottery is configured. Reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols is not aligned with an effective line.

  In such a slot machine, as a state advantageous to the player, a bonus, an RT with an improved replay probability than in the normal state, or a specific small part that is missed by the operation procedure even if won in the internal lottery Some of them are controlled by an AT (Assist Time) for notifying information corresponding to the selection situation when one of the above is won.

  In addition, the AT can be controlled as an advantageous state, and the number of AT games, which is the number of games to be controlled by the AT, can be given (added) as a privilege, and all the added AT games can be notified at one time. There has been a slot machine that divides a plurality of times for notification (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 4963743

  However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, it is determined whether the number of assigned AT games is notified all at once or divided into a plurality of times regardless of the number of AT games. It was. For this reason, even when a relatively large number of AT games or the maximum number of AT games are given, the notification is divided into a plurality of times. As a result, a relatively large number of AT games and a maximum number of AT games are given, so that the player cannot have a superior feeling that should have been originally provided to the player. There is a possibility that inconvenience that the number of games and the maximum number of AT games cannot be contributed to the improvement of interest.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the interest of the game by surely giving the player a sense of superiority due to the provision of a privilege with a high degree of advantage. It is to provide a slot machine that can.

(1) A variable display device capable of starting a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value and variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Advantageous amount setting means (FIGS. 15 and 16) for setting the advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means (processing for controlling to AT while the number of AT games is consumed by the sub-control unit 91) When,
Specific control means for performing a specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increased advantageous amounts (10 to 250) and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount (the number of AT games is specified by the sub-control unit 91) Processing for updating information to
Informing means (FIG. 18) for notifying information that can be specified by the player about the increased advantageous amount added by the specifying control means,
The notification means includes
When the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the first information for notifying the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount in a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game Notification means (processing for executing the game number notification effect when it is determined for the number of unreported games in FIG. 19 or the number of additional games this time);
Means for notifying a plurality of times of information that can be specified for an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount in a plurality of game periods longer than the predetermined period when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means; Second informing means for informing information a plurality of times so that the player can specify the increased advantage amount from a plurality of information in a plurality of game periods (game when determined to be any one of 5 to 50 in FIG. 19) A process for executing a number notification effect),
The first notification means notifies the increase advantage when the maximum amount (250) of the plurality of increase advantages is added as the increase advantage (the preferential period in FIG. 19A, AT end) During RT3 later, the preferential period in FIG. 19 (b), during AT + normal, AT + RT2, is always determined for the number of unreported games or the number of additional games this time, in the modified example [notification at the time of obtaining the maximum number of AT games About column).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the added increased advantageous amount in a predetermined period or to be notified in a plurality of times, while adding the maximum amount as the increased advantageous amount among the plurality of increased advantageous amounts. The increase advantageous amount at the time of being notified is notified in a predetermined period. For this reason, it is possible to give an impression that the increased advantageous amount is added a plurality of times when notified in a plurality of times, and it is notified in a plurality of times when the maximum amount is added as the increased advantageous amount. By preventing this, it is possible to surely give the player a sense of superiority due to the addition of the maximum amount, and to improve the fun of the game.

  The advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means is subtracted according to the progress of the game, and when it reaches 0, the control to the advantageous state is completed. The subtraction opportunity of the advantageous amount may be established when one game is consumed, a predetermined number of games are consumed, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a navigation effect is executed), or the like.

  If the first notification means starts the notification within a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game, the first notification means continues the notification even after the period has elapsed. Also good. In addition, the first notification means is not limited to one notification as long as it notifies about the increased advantageous amount within a predetermined period, and the increased advantageous amount is divided into a plurality of times within a predetermined period. May be used for notification. In the case where the increased advantageous amount is divided into a plurality of pieces and notified a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the divided amount may be notified a plurality of times, or one of the divided amounts After the notification, the remaining amount may be sequentially added to the notified amount to notify (see the column [Regarding notification within a predetermined period or at one timing] in the modification).

  The multiple game period may be a predetermined period (for example, while the predetermined number of games are consumed) as long as it is longer than the predetermined period, or a period that changes each time (determined by random lottery). Etc.).

(2) A variable display device capable of starting a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value and variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Advantageous amount setting means (FIGS. 15 and 16) for setting the advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means (processing for controlling to AT while the number of AT games is consumed by the sub-control unit 91) When,
Specific control means for performing a specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increased advantageous amounts (10 to 250) and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount (the number of AT games is specified by the sub-control unit 91) Processing for updating information to
Informing means (FIG. 18) for notifying information that can be specified by the player about the increased advantageous amount added by the specifying control means,
The notification means includes
When the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, first notification means for notifying information that can be specified by the player for the increased advantageous amount at one timing (the number of unreported games in FIG. 19 or this time addition) A process for executing a game number notification effect when the number of games is determined), and
Means for notifying information identifiable about an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount at each of a plurality of timings when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the information from each of the plurality of timings Second informing means for informing information so that the player can specify the increased advantageous amount (a process for executing the game number informing effect when it is determined as any of 5 to 50 in FIG. 19); Including
The first notification means notifies the increase advantage when the maximum amount (250) of the plurality of increase advantages is added as the increase advantage (the preferential period in FIG. 19A, AT end) During RT3 later, the preferential period in FIG. 19 (b), during AT + normal, AT + RT2, is always determined for the number of unreported games or the number of additional games this time, in the modified example [notification at the time of obtaining the maximum number of AT games About column).

  According to such a configuration, the maximum increase amount among the plurality of increase advantage amounts can be notified while the added increase advantage amount can be notified at one timing or divided into a plurality of timings. As for the increased advantageous amount when added as, the notification is made at one timing. For this reason, it is possible to give an impression that the increased advantageous amount is added a plurality of times when it is notified in a plurality of timings, and when the maximum amount is added as the increased advantageous amount, it is divided into a plurality of timings. By preventing the notification, the player can surely have a sense of superiority due to the addition of the maximum amount, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means is subtracted according to the progress of the game, and when it reaches 0, the control to the advantageous state is completed. The subtraction opportunity of the advantageous amount may be established when one game is consumed, a predetermined number of games are consumed, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a navigation effect is executed), or the like.

  The first notification means is not limited to the one-time notification as long as the increase advantageous amount is notified at one timing, but is divided into a plurality of increase advantageous amounts at one timing (for example, related to one game). May be notified in a plurality of times within a period. In the case where the increased advantageous amount is divided into a plurality of times and notified a plurality of times within one timing, the amount divided into a plurality of amounts may be notified a plurality of times, and one of the divided amounts After notifying the amount, the remaining amount may be sequentially added to the notified amount for notification (see the column [Regarding notification within a predetermined period or at one timing] in the modification).

  The plurality of timings may be a predetermined number of times, or may be a number of times that changes each time (determined by random lottery, etc.).

(3) A variable display device capable of starting a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value and variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Advantageous amount setting means (FIGS. 15 and 16) for setting the advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means (processing for controlling to AT while the number of AT games is consumed by the sub-control unit 91) When,
Specific control means for performing a specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increased advantageous amounts (10 to 250) and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount (the number of AT games is specified by the sub-control unit 91) Processing for updating information to
Informing means (FIG. 18) for notifying information that can be specified by the player about the increased advantageous amount added by the specifying control means,
The notification means includes
When the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the first information for notifying the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount in a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game Notification means (processing for executing the game number notification effect when it is determined for the number of unreported games in FIG. 19 or the number of additional games this time);
Means for notifying a plurality of times of information that can be specified for an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount in a plurality of game periods longer than the predetermined period when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means; Second informing means for informing information a plurality of times so that the player can specify the increased advantage amount from a plurality of information in a plurality of game periods (game when determined to be any one of 5 to 50 in FIG. 19) A process for executing a number notification effect),
The first notification means notifies the increase advantageous amount when the maximum amount (250) of the plurality of increase advantageous amounts is added as the increase advantageous amount at a higher rate than the second notification means (see FIG. (A preferential period in 19 (a), during RT3 after the end of AT, preferential period in FIG. 19 (b), during AT + normal, AT + RT2 is always determined as the number of unreported games or the number of games added this time).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the added increased advantageous amount in a predetermined period or to be notified in a plurality of times, while adding the maximum amount as the increased advantageous amount among the plurality of increased advantageous amounts. The increased advantageous amount is notified at a high rate for a predetermined period. For this reason, it is possible to give an impression that the increased advantageous amount is added a plurality of times when notified in a plurality of times, and it is notified in a plurality of times when the maximum amount is added as the increased advantageous amount. By preventing this as much as possible, it is possible to surely give the player a sense of superiority due to the addition of the maximum amount, and to improve the fun of the game.

  The advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means is subtracted according to the progress of the game, and when it reaches 0, the control to the advantageous state is completed. The subtraction opportunity of the advantageous amount may be established when one game is consumed, a predetermined number of games are consumed, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a navigation effect is executed), or the like.

  If the first notification means starts the notification within a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game, the first notification means continues the notification even after the period has elapsed. Also good. In addition, the first notification means is not limited to one notification as long as it notifies about the increased advantageous amount within a predetermined period, and the increased advantageous amount is divided into a plurality of times within a predetermined period. May be used for notification. In the case where the increased advantageous amount is divided into a plurality of pieces and notified a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the divided amount may be notified a plurality of times, or one of the divided amounts After the notification, the remaining amount may be sequentially added to the notified amount to notify (see the column [Regarding notification within a predetermined period or at one timing] in the modification).

  The multiple game period may be a predetermined period (for example, while the predetermined number of games are consumed) as long as it is longer than the predetermined period, or a period that changes each time (determined by random lottery). Etc.).

(4) A variable display device capable of starting a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value and variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Advantageous amount setting means (FIGS. 15 and 16) for setting the advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means (processing for controlling to AT while the number of AT games is consumed by the sub-control unit 91) When,
Specific control means for performing a specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increased advantageous amounts (10 to 250) and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount (the number of AT games is specified by the sub-control unit 91) Processing for updating information to
Informing means (FIG. 18) for notifying information that can be specified by the player about the increased advantageous amount added by the specifying control means,
The notification means includes
When the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, first notification means for notifying information that can be specified by the player for the increased advantageous amount at one timing (the number of unreported games in FIG. 19 or this time addition) A process for executing a game number notification effect when the number of games is determined), and
Means for notifying information identifiable about an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount at each of a plurality of timings when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the information from each of the plurality of timings Second informing means for informing information so that the player can specify the increased advantageous amount (a process for executing the game number informing effect when it is determined as any of 5 to 50 in FIG. 19); Including
The first notification means notifies the increase advantageous amount when the maximum amount (250) of the plurality of increase advantageous amounts is added as the increase advantageous amount at a higher rate than the second notification means (see FIG. (A preferential period in 19 (a), during RT3 after the end of AT, preferential period in FIG. 19 (b), during AT + normal, AT + RT2 is always determined as the number of unreported games or the number of games added this time).

  According to such a configuration, the maximum increase amount among the plurality of increase advantage amounts can be notified while the added increase advantage amount can be notified at one timing or divided into a plurality of timings. As for the increased advantageous amount at the time of being added, a high rate is notified at one timing. For this reason, it is possible to give an impression that the increased advantageous amount is added a plurality of times when it is notified in a plurality of timings, and when the maximum amount is added as the increased advantageous amount, it is divided into a plurality of timings. By preventing the notification as much as possible, it is possible to surely give the player a sense of superiority due to the addition of the maximum amount, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means is subtracted according to the progress of the game, and when it reaches 0, the control to the advantageous state is completed. The subtraction opportunity of the advantageous amount may be established when one game is consumed, a predetermined number of games are consumed, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a navigation effect is executed), or the like.

  The first notification means is not limited to the one-time notification as long as the increase advantageous amount is notified at one timing, but is divided into a plurality of increase advantageous amounts at one timing (for example, related to one game). May be notified in a plurality of times within a period. In the case where the increased advantageous amount is divided into a plurality of times and notified a plurality of times within one timing, the amount divided into a plurality of amounts may be notified a plurality of times, and one of the divided amounts After notifying the amount, the remaining amount may be sequentially added to the notified amount for notification (see the column [Regarding notification within a predetermined period or at one timing] in the modification).

  The plurality of timings may be a predetermined number of times, or may be a number of times that changes each time (determined by random lottery, etc.).

(5) In any one of the above-described (1) to (4), when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, addition notification means for notifying that the addition has been added (game number notification effect) , Freeze production, Freeze production)
When the maximum amount is added as an increase advantage amount, the addition notification means delay control (freeze effect) for delaying the progress of the game at a higher rate than when the increase advantage amount less than the maximum amount is added. ) To notify the addition (see FIG. 16D, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when the maximum amount is added as the increase advantageous amount, the fact that it has been added at a high rate is notified by performing delay control. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the delay control is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) The specific control means performs the specific control so that the expected value of the increased advantageous amount is larger when it is a specific period (preferential period) than when it is not the specific period (FIGS. 14 and 15B). ),
The increased advantageous amount added during the specific period is notified by the first notification means within the specific period (FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b)). When the number of games is less than 40, the number is always determined as the number of unreported games or the number of additional games this time, see the “Notification during preferential period” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, the increased advantageous amount added during the specific period in which the expectation for adding the increased advantageous amount is improved is notified during the predetermined period. For this reason, by preventing being notified in multiple times during a specific period, it is possible to make the player experience the advantage of the specific period and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, about the increase advantage amount added at the said specific period, the said 1st alerting | reporting means alert | reports within the said specified period at a rate higher than a said 2nd alerting | reporting means (FIG. 19 (a) (b) When the number of games not yet notified or this time added game is less than 40 during the preferential period, it is always determined that the number of games not yet notified or the number of games added this time is higher when it is 40 or more. .

(7) Information setting means (S13 in FIG. 18) for setting an advantageous amount corresponding value (notification game number information) indicating an advantageous amount specified from the increased advantageous amount notified by the notification means;
Information updating means (S16 in FIG. 18) for updating the value corresponding to the advantageous amount so that the advantageous amount decreases according to the progress of the game in the advantageous state;
The state control means includes interruption means (see FIG. 6) that interrupts the advantageous state when a predetermined interruption condition is established in the advantageous state (stopping the falling-out).
The information update means updates the advantageous amount corresponding value even after the interruption condition is satisfied (see S15 in FIG. 18),
When the predetermined control condition is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied and the advantageous amount remains, the state control means resumes the control of the advantageous state with the remaining advantageous amount. (It can be controlled to ART again by stopping operation according to the navigation effect performed according to the number of remaining AT games)
The specific control means is a special period (AT + normal, AT + RT2) that specifies that the advantageous amount remains after the start condition is satisfied after the interruption condition is satisfied. The specific control is also performed (see FIG. 13).

  According to such a configuration, the advantageous amount corresponding value set in response to the notification of the increased advantageous amount is updated so as to decrease according to the progress of the game in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state In the special period after the interruption condition for interrupting is established, the update is also performed. On the other hand, in the special period, the specific control is performed and the increased advantageous amount can be added. That is, the advantage for the player can be compensated for by performing the specific control as compared with the case where the advantage amount corresponding value is simply subtracted in the special period. As a result, the interest of the game during the special period can be improved.

(8) In the slot machine of any one of (1) to (7), the specific control means includes
One of the advantageous amounts over the predetermined advantageous amount (10 games) is determined as the increasing advantageous amount,
When it is the specific period, the predetermined advantageous amount is determined as an increased advantageous amount at a rate higher than any other advantageous amount other than the predetermined advantageous amount (FIG. 15B).

  According to such a configuration, although the predetermined advantageous amount is determined as the increased advantageous amount at a high rate during the specific period, since the predetermined advantageous amount is notified in the predetermined period, the predetermined advantageous amount is notified in multiple times. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game during a specific period from being lowered.

  (9) In any one of the above-described slot machines (1) to (8), the specific control means adds an increase advantageous amount for each game during the specific period (FIG. 14).

  According to such a configuration, since the game advantage amount is added every specific period, the interest of the game in the specific period can be improved.

(10) In any one of the slot machines of the above (1) to (9), the state control means controls the special state (non-AT + RT3) after the advantageous state is finished,
About the increase advantage amount added when it is the said special state, a said 1st alerting | reporting means alert | reports (FIG. 19 (a)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pleasure of being controlled again in the advantageous state from being attenuated.

In any one of the slot machines (1) to (9), the state control means controls the special state after the advantageous state is finished,
About the increase advantage amount added when it is the said special state, the said 1st alerting | reporting means may alert | report at a rate higher than a said 2nd alerting | reporting means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the attenuation of the pleasure of being controlled again in the advantageous state.

  (11) In the slot machine of any one of (1) to (10) above, the specific control means is a period up to the predetermined timing when the specific period is a period after the predetermined timing (final game). The specific control is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than at a certain time (FIG. 15B).

  According to such a structure, possibility that a player will be satisfied in the period after a predetermined timing among specific periods increases, and the interest of the game in a specific period can be improved.

  Any one of the above-described (1) to (11) may further include the following configurations (a) to (i).

(A) The variable display device derives a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. Is possible,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. And a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game;
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving the display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the determination result of the predetermination means when the derivation operation means is operated When,
When a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is established by the specific control means, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship (for example, “white 7” Special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) for determining whether or not to perform special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)) for performing variation control of the plurality of variable display areas so as to be in a straight line) )When,
When the special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation validation means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special fluctuation control means for performing the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
When the special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the special variation control is performed before the special variation control (reel effect control). The positional relationship after the special variation control (reel effect control) is set so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by (reel effect control) is random. Positional relationship determining means to determine (positional relationship determination processing);
After the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special variation control means, the relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is determined as the positional relationship determination means (positional relationship determination processing). A positional relationship changing means for changing to the positional relationship determined by
The derivation operation enabling means is configured such that when the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special fluctuation control means, the positional relationship changing means causes the relative information of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas to be relative to each other. After the positional relationship is changed, the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is validated (see Example 2 in the [Regarding effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation unit is delayed. Since the special variation control in which a plurality of variable display areas are controlled is performed in such a manner, it is possible to produce an impact effect in the display mode of the variable display areas, and after the special variation control, before the derivation operation means becomes effective In addition, since the relative positional relationship between multiple variable display areas that have been in a specific positional relationship by special variation control is changed to a random positional relationship, even if special variation control with a specific positional relationship is performed, the special variation If the control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur, and the display result is displayed by technical intervention by the player by performing the special variation control. It is not entirely compromised game of the slot machine that causes out.

(B) The variable display device derives a display result for each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can each be identified in a predetermined order. Is possible,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. And a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game;
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving the display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the determination result of the predetermination means when the derivation operation means is operated When,
When a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is established by the specific control means, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship (for example, “white 7” Special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) for determining whether or not to perform special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)) for performing variation control of the plurality of variable display areas so as to be in a straight line) )When,
When the special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation validation means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special fluctuation control means for performing the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
After the special variation control means performs the special variation control (reel effect control), the relative identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special variation control (reel effect control). Positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) for determining the positional relationship after the special variation control (reel effect control) so that the specific positional relationship is random;
After the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special variation control means, the relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is determined as the positional relationship determination means (positional relationship determination processing). A positional relationship changing means for changing to the positional relationship determined by
The derivation operation enabling means is configured such that when the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special fluctuation control means, the positional relationship changing means causes the relative information of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas to be relative to each other. After the positional relationship is changed, the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is validated (see Example 2 in the [Regarding effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation unit is delayed. Since the special variation control in which a plurality of variable display areas are controlled is performed in such a manner, it is possible to produce an impact effect in the display mode of the variable display areas, and after the special variation control, before the derivation operation means becomes effective In addition, since the relative positional relationship between multiple variable display areas that have been in a specific positional relationship by special variation control is changed to a random positional relationship, even if special variation control with a specific positional relationship is performed, the special variation If the control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur, and the display result is displayed by technical intervention by the player by performing the special variation control. It is not entirely compromised game of the slot machine that causes out.

  The slot machines of (a) and (b) may further have the following configuration.

  The positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) randomly determines the amount of change in positional relationship between each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) and other variable display areas (change) (Refer to Example 3 in the “About effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the special variation control, the positional relationship between the plurality of variable display areas when the derivation operation unit is activated becomes more irregular.

  In addition, the positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) can change the positional relationship change amount between each variable display area and another variable display area every time the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed. It may be provided with the same combination reduction means (change amount determination lottery using random numbers whose total number is relatively prime) for reducing the ratio of the same combination (in the “About the effect during delay control” column in the modification) See Example 3).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the positional relationship between the plurality of variable display areas when the derivation operation unit is activated for each special variation control.

  Note that each time the special variation control is performed, as a method of reducing the ratio of the combination of the change amounts of the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area to the same combination, for example, each variable display area As a random number used for the determination, there are a method using a random number whose update range is relatively prime, a method of shifting a random number extraction timing every time the special variation control is performed, and the like.

  Further, the positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) is the same change amount reducing means (the total number of which is relatively small) that reduces the rate at which the positional relationship changes between each variable display area and the other variable display areas are the same. (A change amount determination lottery using random numbers) may be provided (see Example 3 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid as much as possible that the specific positional relationship is maintained when the derivation operation means is validated.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the rate at which the amount of change in the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area is the same, for example, as a random number used to determine each variable display area, the total number of update ranges is mutually A method that uses a random number that is a prime number, a method that uses a random number whose period start value is randomly changed, and a random number extraction timing that is used for each variable display area determination The method of shifting is applicable.

  Further, the positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) determines any positional relationship based on a relative positional relationship between a plurality of different variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) determined in advance. Randomly determined (positional relationship determination lottery) may be used (see Example 3 in the “About effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the plurality of variable display areas from being biased when the derivation operation unit is validated.

(C) The variable display device causes a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable to be periodically moved in a predetermined order to derive a display result in each of the variable display areas that can be variably displayed. Is possible,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A winning can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game;
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving the display result to the variable display area based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Special variation control (reel effect control) is performed to display specific identification information (for example, “7”) in the variable display area when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means. Special fluctuation control determining means (freeze lottery) to determine whether or not,
When the special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation validation means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special fluctuation control means for performing the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
When the special variation control determining means determines that the special variation control (reel effect control) is to be performed, the special identification control (for example, reel specific effect control) is performed before the special variation control (reel effect control). , “7”) is displayed, acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) for randomly determining the acceleration time until the moving speed of the variable display area (reel) reaches a specified speed (constant speed rotation) When,
After the specific identification information (for example, “7”) is displayed by the special variation control (reel effect control), the variable is made according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing). Acceleration control means for accelerating the display area (reel) to the specified speed (constant speed rotation),
When the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed, the derivation operation enabling means displays the specific identification information (for example, “7”) by the special variation control (reel effect control). Then, after the variable display area (reel) is accelerated according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) and reaches the specified speed (constant speed rotation), the derivation operation means (Operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) are validated (see Example 5 in the [About effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the game is started, special variation control is performed in which specific identification information is displayed in the variable display area in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed. Since the display mode of the area can produce an impact, and after the specific identification information is displayed by the special variation control, the acceleration time until the moving speed of the variable display area becomes the specified speed is randomly changed. Even if special variation control for displaying specific identification information is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special variation control is not performed. The playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired.

  The special variation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area is, for example, control for stopping the specific identification information for a predetermined time in the variable display area, or displaying specific identification information that is not stopped. For example, control for moving at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed at the specified timing, and control for displaying specific identification information while moving it within the variable display area over a predetermined time.

(D) The variable display device causes a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable to be periodically moved in a predetermined order to derive a display result in each of the variable display areas that can be variably displayed. Is possible,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A winning can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game;
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving the display result to the variable display area based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Special variation control (reel effect control) is performed to display specific identification information (for example, “7”) in the variable display area when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means. Special fluctuation control determining means (freeze lottery) to determine whether or not,
When the special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation validation means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special fluctuation control means for performing the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
After the specific identification information (for example, “7”) is displayed by the special variation control (reel effect control), the moving speed of the variable display area (reel) is changed to a specified speed (constant speed rotation). Acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) that randomly determines the acceleration time;
After the specific identification information (for example, “7”) is displayed by the special variation control (reel effect control), the variable is made according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing). Acceleration control means for accelerating the display area (reel) to the specified speed (constant speed rotation),
When the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed, the derivation operation enabling means displays the specific identification information (for example, “7”) by the special variation control (reel effect control). Then, after the variable display area (reel) is accelerated according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) and reaches the specified speed (constant speed rotation), the derivation operation means (Operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) are validated (see Example 5 in the [About effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the game is started, special variation control is performed in which specific identification information is displayed in the variable display area in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed. Since the display mode of the area can produce an impact, and after the specific identification information is displayed by the special variation control, the acceleration time until the moving speed of the variable display area becomes the specified speed is randomly changed. Even if special variation control for displaying specific identification information is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special variation control is not performed. The playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired.

  The special variation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area is, for example, control for stopping the specific identification information for a predetermined time in the variable display area, or displaying specific identification information that is not stopped. For example, control for moving at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed at the specified timing, and control for displaying specific identification information while moving it within the variable display area over a predetermined time.

  The slot machines of (c) and (d) may further have the following configuration.

The variable display device includes the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
One game is completed when the display results are derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, and a prize is awarded according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. Is supposed to occur,
The acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) may determine the acceleration time at random for each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) (acceleration time determination lottery). Good (refer to Example 5 in the [About effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, since the acceleration time is randomly changed for each variable display area, even when special variation control for displaying specific identification information is performed, the acceleration time of each variable display area is further reduced. Can be regular.

  Further, the acceleration time determining means (acceleration time determining process) reduces the rate at which the combination of the acceleration times for each variable display region is the same combination each time the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed. The combination reduction means (acceleration time determination lottery using random numbers whose total numbers are relatively prime) may be provided (see Example 5 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a bias from occurring in the acceleration time until the specified speed is reached for each special variation control.

  As a method for reducing the rate at which the combination of the acceleration times for each variable display area is the same each time the special variation control is performed, for example, update as a random number used to determine each variable display area A method using a random number whose total number is relatively prime, a method of shifting a random number extraction timing each time the special variation control is performed, and the like are applicable.

  Further, the acceleration time determining means (acceleration time determining process) is the same acceleration time reducing means (acceleration time using random numbers whose total number is relatively prime) for reducing the rate at which the acceleration time is the same for each variable display area. Determination lottery) may be provided (see Example 5 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the same acceleration time in a plurality of variable display areas.

  As a method for reducing the rate at which the acceleration time is the same for each variable display area, for example, as a random number used for determining each variable display area, a method using a random number whose update range is relatively prime, As a random number used for determining each variable display area, a method using a random number whose cycle start value is randomly changed, a method for shifting a random number extraction timing used for each variable display area determination, and the like are applicable.

The variable display device includes the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
One game is completed when the display results are derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, and a prize is awarded according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. Is supposed to occur,
The acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination process) is to randomly determine any combination from a plurality of predetermined combinations of acceleration times for the different variable display areas (acceleration time combination determination lottery). (Refer to Example 5 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the acceleration time for each of the plurality of variable display areas from being biased.

(E) The variable display device causes a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable to be periodically moved in a predetermined order to derive a display result in each of the variable display areas that can be variably displayed. Is possible,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A winning can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game;
Derivation control means (reel stop control) for performing control for deriving the display result to the variable display area based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Special variation control (reel effect control) is performed to display specific identification information (for example, “7”) in the variable display area when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means. Special fluctuation control determining means (freeze lottery) to determine whether or not,
When the special variation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special variation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation validation means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special fluctuation control means for performing the special fluctuation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
When the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed, the initial position specification that specifies the initial position (the position of the reel before the reel effect control) that is the position of the variable display area before the special variation control is performed. Means,
After the specific identification information (for example, “7”) is displayed by the special variation control (reel effect control), the position of the variable display area (reel) is changed to the initial position (the position of the reel before the reel effect control). Initial position control means for performing control to return to
When the special variation control (reel effect control) is performed, the derivation operation enabling means displays the specific identification information (for example, “7”) by the special variation control (reel effect control). Thereafter, after the position of the variable display area (reel) is returned to the initial position (the position of the reel before the reel effect control) by the initial position control means, the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) (See Example 1 in the [Regarding effects during delay control] field in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the game is started, special variation control is performed in which specific identification information is displayed in the variable display area in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed. The display mode of the area can produce an impact, and after the specific identification information is displayed by the special variation control, the position of the variable display region is returned to the position before performing the special variation control, and then the derivation operation means Because the operation is enabled, even if special variation control that displays specific identification information is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special variation control is not performed. By performing the variation control, the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player is not impaired.

  The special variation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area is, for example, control for stopping the specific identification information for a predetermined time in the variable display area, or displaying specific identification information that is not stopped. For example, control for moving at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed at the specified timing, and control for displaying specific identification information while moving it within the variable display area over a predetermined time.

(F) The variable display device includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine 1),
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. An effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated as a condition;
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid), the derivation operation means is supported based on the determination result of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing derivation control (reel stop control) for deriving a display result to the variable display area
Effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means; ,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “white 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special fluctuation control means for performing special fluctuation control (reel effect) for fluctuation control;
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special variation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where variation is stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). First moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) in any one of the variable display areas (left reel) toward the specified speed when is in the specific state (stopped state). ,
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), at least one of the variable display areas (reel 2L / reels 2L, 2C) ) Is in the steady state (constant speed rotation), the moving speed in any variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) that has not yet been in the steady state (constant speed rotation) is defined. Second moving speed changing means for changing the speed,
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) has been reached,
Specific time determining means for randomly determining a specific time (time based on left, middle, and right reel timer values) until the second moving speed changing means changes the moving speed;
The second moving speed changing means determines that the variable display area (reel 2L / reel 2C) that last changed the moving speed has reached the steady state (constant speed rotation), and then moves the moving speed. Variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) is changed based on the elapse of a specific time (setting of left, middle and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determining means. Change the moving speed of the area (reel 2C / reel 2R),
The specific time determining means is the second moving speed changing means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). Determine all the specific times used (time based on left, middle and right reel timer values),
The game control means (main control unit 41), after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), The specific time (left, middle) determined by the specific time determining means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). And specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the right reel timer value to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). (See Example 6 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the example).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special variation control is performed to control the variation of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship. After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and then the movement speed of any of the variable display areas changes toward the specified speed, and then Because the time until the moving speed of the variable display area changes randomly changes, the moving speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and becomes a steady state. Since the relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special variation control becomes a random positional relationship when it is determined and enters the valid acceptance state, the specific positional relationship and Even if special fluctuation control is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special fluctuation control is not performed, and the display result is obtained by technical intervention by the player by performing special fluctuation control. The gaming ability of the slot machine to be derived is not impaired.

(G) The variable display device includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can each be identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine 1),
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. An effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated as a condition;
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid), the derivation operation means is supported based on the determination result of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing derivation control (reel stop control) for deriving a display result to the variable display area
Effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means; ,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “white 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special fluctuation control means for performing special fluctuation control (reel effect) for fluctuation control;
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special variation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where variation is stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). First moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) in any one of the variable display areas (left reel) toward the specified speed when is in the specific state (stopped state). ,
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), at least one of the variable display areas (reel 2L / reels 2L, 2C) ) Is in the steady state (constant speed rotation), the moving speed in any variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) that has not yet been in the steady state (constant speed rotation) is defined. Second moving speed changing means for changing the speed,
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) has been reached,
Specific time determining means for randomly determining a specific time (time based on left, middle, and right reel timer values) until the second moving speed changing means changes the moving speed;
The second moving speed changing means is configured to change the moving speed after the variable display area (reel 2L / reel 2C) that has changed the moving speed last starts changing the moving speed. From the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determination means (reel 2C / reel 2R) and the specific state (stop state) to the steady state (constant speed) The moving speed of the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) is changed based on the elapse of a sum of a predetermined arrival time (acceleration time) sufficient to reach (rotation),
The specific time determining means is the second moving speed changing means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). Determine all the specific times used (time based on left, middle and right reel timer values),
The game control means (main control unit 41), after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), The specific time (left, middle) determined by the specific time determining means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). And specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the right reel timer value to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). Refer to Example 7 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the example).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special variation control is performed to control the variation of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship. After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and then the movement speed of any of the variable display areas changes toward the specified speed, and then Because the time until the moving speed of the variable display area changes randomly changes, the moving speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and becomes a steady state. Since the relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special variation control becomes a random positional relationship when it is determined and enters the valid acceptance state, the specific positional relationship and Even if special fluctuation control is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special fluctuation control is not performed, and the display result is obtained by technical intervention by the player by performing special fluctuation control. The gaming ability of the slot machine to be derived is not impaired.

(H) The variable display device includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine)
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. An effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated as a condition;
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid), the derivation operation means is supported based on the determination result of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing derivation control (reel stop control) for deriving a display result to the variable display area
Effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means; ,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “white 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special fluctuation control means for performing special fluctuation control (reel effect) for fluctuation control;
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special variation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where variation is stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), the variable display area (reel) in the specific state (stopped state) A moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) toward the specified speed (constant speed rotation);
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) has been reached,
A specific time (time based on the timer values for the left, middle, and right reels) until the movement speed of the variable display area corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is changed from a predetermined range. A specific time determining means for determining at random;
The moving speed changing means is controlled to the specific state (stopped state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) by the specific state control means, and then the plurality of variable display areas (reels) 2L, 2C, 2R) has passed the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determining means corresponding to any variable display area (reel). And changing the moving speed of the variable display area corresponding to the specific time (the reel timer value for the reel is 0),
The specific time determining means may be configured to change the plurality of variable display areas (before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first) before the moving speed changing means changes the moving speed of any of the variable display areas. Determining all the specific times (time based on the timer values for the left, middle and right reels) corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
In the game control means, after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), the moving speed changing means The specific time (left, middle, and right reels) determined by the specific time determination means before changing the moving speed of any of the variable display areas (before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first) Specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the timer value to the effect control means (sub control unit 91) is further included ([delay in the modified example] Example 8 and Example 9 in the “Regarding effects during control” column).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special variation control is performed to perform variation control of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship. After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and thereafter the movement speed of the identification information of each variable display area changes toward the specified speed. Because the time of the change in the time of the random is determined that the moving speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas has become the specified speed, it has become a steady state, and enters the valid acceptance state In this case, since the relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special variation control becomes a random positional relationship, even when the special variation control with the specific positional relationship is performed If the special variation control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur, and the slot machine's playability is that the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the special variation control. It will not be damaged.

  The moving speed changing means changing the moving speed toward the specified speed means, for example, that if the specified state is a stop state, the movement is started and accelerated toward the specified speed. If the state is slower than the specified speed, the vehicle is accelerated toward the specified speed. If the specific state is faster than the specified speed, the vehicle is decelerated toward the specified speed.

(I) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine)
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) each operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. An effective acceptance state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated as a condition;
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid), the derivation operation means is supported based on the determination result of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing derivation control (reel stop control) for deriving a display result to the variable display area
Effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when a specific condition for adding the increased advantageous amount is satisfied by the specific control means; ,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “white 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special fluctuation control means for performing special fluctuation control (reel effect) for fluctuation control;
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special variation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where variation is stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). First moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) in any one of the variable display areas (left reel) toward the specified speed when is in the specific state (stopped state). ,
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), at least one of the variable display areas (reel 2L / reels 2L, 2C) ) Is in the steady state (constant speed rotation), the moving speed in any variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) that has not yet been in the steady state (constant speed rotation) is defined. Second moving speed changing means for changing the speed,
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) has been reached,
A specific time (time based on the timer values for the left, middle, and right reels) until the movement speed of the variable display area corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is changed from a predetermined range. A specific time determining means for determining at random,
The first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed after the specific state control means controls the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state). The variable display area (left reel) based on the elapse of a specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determining means. Change the moving speed of the reel)
The second moving speed changing means changes the moving speed of the variable display area (reel 2L / reel 2C) that last changed the moving speed, and then changes the moving speed. The variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R / reel 2R) is determined based on the elapse of a specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determination means. Change the moving speed of the reel 2R),
The specific time determining means is the second moving speed changing means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). Determine all the specific times used (time based on left, middle and right reel timer values),
The game control means (main control unit 41), after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), The specific time (left, middle) determined by the specific time determining means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). And specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the right reel timer value to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). (Example 8 and Example 9 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column)

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special variation control is performed to perform variation control of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship. After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and then the time until the movement speed of the identification information of the variable display area is changed for the first time, either After the movement speed of the identification information in the variable display area changes toward the specified speed, the time until the movement speed of the identification information in the variable display area is changed next randomly changes. When the movement speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and it is determined that it is in a steady state and is in the valid acceptance state, a plurality of variable display areas that are in a specific positional relationship by special variation control Since the relative positional relationship between the identification information of each other is a random positional relationship, even if special variation control with a specific positional relationship is performed, certain rules that do not occur if special variation control is not performed The slot machine's gameability, in which the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing special variation control, is not lost.

  The slot machines (f) to (i) may further have the following configuration.

  The first moving speed changing means and the second moving speed changing means change the moving speed toward a specified speed. For example, if the specific state is a stopped state, the movement is started and the moving speed is changed to the specified speed. If the specified state is slower than the specified speed, the vehicle accelerates toward the specified speed. If the specified state is faster than the specified speed, the vehicle decelerates toward the specified speed. That is.

  The first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed of the identification information in any one of the variable display areas toward the specified speed. The moving speed in any one of the variable display areas is changed to the specified speed. The configuration may be such that the moving speed in any two or more variable display areas is changed toward the specified speed.

  Further, the second moving speed changing means changing the moving speed in any of the variable display areas that are not yet in the steady state toward the specified speed is any one that is not yet in the steady state. The moving speed in one variable display area may be changed toward the specified speed, or the moving speed in any two or more variable display areas not yet in the steady state may be set toward the specified speed. The configuration may be changed.

  Further, an effective reception state control means for effectively accepting that the derivation operation means has been operated, and a determination by the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated in the effective reception state Derivation control means for performing derivation control for deriving a display result in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the result, and effective reception state delay means for delaying the effective reception state, and The relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship in a delay period in which the special variation control unit delays the effective reception state delay unit from entering the effective reception state. The special variation control is performed to perform variation control of the plurality of variable display areas so that the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated. When the invalidation control means for controlling to the invalidation state and the derivation operation means are operated, the display result is derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the determination result of the prior determination means. Derivation control means for performing derivation control, and the relative position relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is specified during the period when the special variation control means is controlled to the invalidation state. A configuration may be adopted in which special variation control is performed to perform variation control of the plurality of variable display areas so as to be in a positional relationship.

  Further, the specific time determining means determines a specific time (time based on left, middle, and right reel timer values) corresponding to each variable display area (reel) using random numbers having different update ranges or update rules. It may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, the possibility that the specific time corresponding to each variable display area is synchronized is low, and when it is determined that all the variable display areas are in a steady state and are in an effective reception state, The relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that have a specific positional relationship by the special variation control can be made a more random positional relationship.

  Further, the specific time determining means uses a random number (left, middle, right delay random number counter) in which the total number included in the update range is relatively prime to specify a specific time (reel) corresponding to each variable display area (reel). The time based on the timer values for the left, middle, and right reels may be determined.

  According to such a configuration, the possibility that the specific time corresponding to each variable display area is synchronized is further reduced, and when it is determined that all the variable display areas are in the steady state and the valid reception state is entered. In addition, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas that have become the specific positional relationship by the special variation control can be made a more random positional relationship.

The game control means (main control unit 41) includes periodic process execution means for executing periodic processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms).
The second moving speed changing means is a value corresponding to the specific time determined by the specific time determining process for the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) for changing the moving speed (1 symbol). A value obtained by dividing the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while moving is divided by N and the timer value for the middle reel / 1 timer interrupt executed while the symbol is moving A value obtained by dividing the number of times the process (main) is executed by N and a value obtained by multiplying the right reel timer value), and the periodic process (timer interrupt process (main)) is set to two or more predetermined values. When the set value becomes a specific value (0) as a result of updating the set value every time the specified number of times (N) is executed, the movement of the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) is performed. The speed may be changed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to measure the specific time without updating the set value every time the periodic processing is executed, and it is possible to reduce the load related to the periodic processing and to measure the specific time. Counter capacity can be reduced.

The game control means (main control unit 41) includes periodic process execution means for executing periodic processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms).
The second moving speed changing means is a value corresponding to the specific time determined by the specific time determining process for the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) for changing the moving speed (1 symbol). A value obtained by multiplying the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while the symbol moves is multiplied by the timer value for the middle reel / one timer interrupt process (main) executed while the symbol moves The value obtained by multiplying the number of times that the timer is used and the timer value for the right reel) and the set value is updated each time the periodic process (timer interrupt process (main)) is executed once. The moving speed of the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) may be changed when the obtained value becomes a specific value (0).

  According to such a configuration, there is no need to perform different processing for each time of the regular processing for counting the specific time, and the branching of the regular processing for the counting of the specific time can be eliminated and the processing can be made common.

  Note that “delaying the activation of the operation” means delaying the progress of the game by performing control that does not accept the operation (control that does not activate), control that does not advance the game even if the operation is accepted, etc. Anything can be used.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and a winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object part and determination value number regarding the special part and small part in a general gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object combination and determination value number regarding the re-game player in a general gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order promotion replays 1-6. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order maintenance replays 1-5. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order rush replays 1-4. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order melons 1-5. It is a figure for demonstrating a freeze lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of AT lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the AT lottery when AT lottery conditions are satisfied. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred by AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred by preferential period transfer lottery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating AT game number alerting | reporting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the table used in order to determine the number of first time games or the number of additional games to alert | report within the range of the number of unreported AT games. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of the change of the number of alerting | reporting games and the number of unnotified games according to the progress of a game. It is explanatory drawing about the specific example which performs AT lottery (addition lottery) in the period after ART is complete | finished until ART is started again. It is explanatory drawing about the specific example which performs AT lottery (addition lottery) in the period after ART is complete | finished until ART is started again. It is explanatory drawing about the specific example of a freezing effect, a freezing effect, and a game number alerting | reporting effect. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Example 2. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Example 3. It is a figure which shows the random number used when determining the change amount of each reel in change amount determination lottery. It is a figure which shows the winning range at the time of determining the change amount of each reel in change amount determination lottery. 10 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects as a modification of Example 3. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of each reel determined in positional relationship determination lottery. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after reel effect which the main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the random number value for delay. It is a figure which shows the method of calculating the timer value for left, middle, and right reels from the random number value for left, middle, and right delay. It is a figure which shows the update method in the modification of the random value for left, middle, and right delay. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after a reel effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after a reel effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after a reel effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production.

Embodiments will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the internal structure of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel constituting the variable display device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the control circuit of the slot machine. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. That is, the see-through window 3 is configured so that three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on each reel can be visually recognized at the positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the outer periphery of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has “melon (for example, the pattern of the area number 20 of the left reel 2L)” and “banana (for example, the area number 19 of the left reel 2L), respectively. ”,“ White 7 (for example, the design of area number 18 on the left reel 2L) ”,“ Black BAR (for example, the design of area number 17 on the left reel 2L) ”,“ Star (for example, on the left reel 2L) "Region No. 14 symbol)", "Grapes (eg, left reel 2L, region No. 13 symbol)", "Black 7 (eg, left reel 2L, No. 10 symbol)", "White BAR (eg, left reel 2L) Reel 2L area number 6 symbol), "strawberry (for example, left reel 2L area number 5 symbol)", "star 7 (for example, left reel 2L area number 1 symbol)" Multiple types of diagrams There are drawn in a predetermined order, one by 21, respectively.

  The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout port 9 through which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) within the range. The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a specified number of bets determined according to the state, the medal stored as credits, and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (setting of credits and bets) The payout switch 10 that is operated when the game is started, the start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and the stop that is operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Switches 8L, 8C, 8R and a production switch 56 for use in production are provided so as to be operable by the player.

  In the present embodiment, “2” is determined as the specified number of bets according to the gaming state being a big bonus and a regular bonus (hereinafter also referred to as a bonus), and the gaming state is a big bonus and a regular bonus. “3” is determined in accordance with a game state other than (hereinafter also referred to as a general game or a general game state).

  The front door 1b is provided with a game display unit 13 for notifying information related to the game. The game display unit 13 displays a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the replay of LED20 notifying is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. It has been.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later by a predetermined key operation and a reset operation for releasing a stop state described later is provided inside the front door 1b. A setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time while changing the setting value or checking the setting value, which will be described later. A stop switch 36a for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function to be controlled, and automatic settlement processing at the end of BB described later (the medal stored as credit is settled regardless of the player's operation ( The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting whether the automatic settlement function to be controlled is to be enabled / disabled, and the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are arranged inside the housing 1a. The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the provided hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) side or the medal payout outlet 9 side is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting medals and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  Inside the casing 1a, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that can detect reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively (see FIG. 4). A reel unit 2 composed of a reel LED 55, an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a medal payout opening for medals stored in the hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out 9 and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at the time of startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state other than a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. In the mode, there are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned ON / OFF. It has been.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or credits are used to set the number of bets. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated.

  When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the corresponding lines of the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) become valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line set in advance to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the see-through window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, four types of pay lines L1 to L4 are defined as pay lines.

  The winning line L1 refers to a winning line set across symbols arranged in the middle of the reel 2L, the middle of the reel 2C, and the middle of the reel 2R, that is, the middle. The winning line L2 refers to a winning line set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. The winning line L3 refers to a winning line set across the symbols arranged in the upper part of the reel 2L, the middle part of the reel 2C, the lower part of the reel 2R, that is, the lower right. The winning line L4 is a winning line that is set across the symbols arranged in the lower part of the reel 2L, the middle part of the reel 2C, the upper part of the reel 2R, that is, the right side up. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L4, and may include, for example, a line straddling the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When a specified number of bets are set in the general gaming state other than the big bonus and the regular bonus, the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid. The game can be started. When a predetermined number of bets are set when the bonus is a big bonus and a regular bonus, the pay lines L2 to L4 are valid and the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1).

  If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game (in this embodiment, 12), and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the activated pay line, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. It has become.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  The game control board 40 includes a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, a settlement switch 10, a reset switch 23, a stop switch 36a, an automatic settlement switch 36b, an insertion medal sensor 31, and a door opening detection switch. 25, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and a payout sensor 34c, a full sensor 35a, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals of switches are input.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes a credit indicator 11, a game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, an insertion request LED 17, a start valid LED 18, a waiting LED 19, a replaying LED 20, a BET switch valid LED 21, a left, middle The right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the above-described hopper motor 34b is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are driven based on the control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Detects a detection signal input from a random number circuit 42 that generates a random number, a pulse oscillator 43 that supplies a clock signal having a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 A switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, various displays connected to the game control board 40, LED drive circuit 47 for controlling the drive of the LED, used for the slot machine 1 When the power supply voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command from power on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the main CPU 41a when no signal is input, a real-time clock 50 for measuring the date and time (hereinafter referred to as RTC 50), and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic process by the occurrence of the interrupt and execute the interrupt process. The voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repetition of the process depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The RTC 50 is a device for measuring time to indicate the current “year (year)”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. For example, the main control unit 41 acquires (extracts) date / time information for specifying the date / time counted by the RTC 50, and based on the acquired date / time information, the contents of the effects in the effect means such as the liquid crystal display 51 and the reels 2L to 2L. A reel control pattern for controlling each of the 2Rs is determined, and effect control and reel control are executed based on the determination.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. Command transmission from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is performed by serial communication. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not limited to being directly connected, and may be configured to be connected via a relay board, for example.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. In addition, an effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 performs output control of effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control part 91, and the sub control part 91 is based on a command from the main control part 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output are controlled. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED55 are illustrated as an effect device, an effect device is not restricted to these, For example, it drives mechanically. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. Switch detection circuit 96, time information including date information and time information The clock device 97 to output, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, other In response to a command transmitted from the game control board 40, the sub CPU 91a performs various controls for performing an effect, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). When a command is acquired from the main control unit 41, a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in a buffer is executed. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Further, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the set value, when the power of the slot machine 1 is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once, and after the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the power of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the number of bets. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 1 is in an ON state, an operation for turning it OFF once, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 38, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 7 for determining the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, a power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 41c, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in the respective bits of the corresponding area of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormality error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In the present embodiment, all the data stored in the RAM 41c is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and when the main CPU 41a determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but only the data required for the control state restoration in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 41c and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore all the states of the input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before the power interruption. If the RAM parity is not 0 (1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main sub CPU 91a, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 91a determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, but only the data required for the control state restoration in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 91c, and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is only necessary to restore the state of the input port, and it is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the case where the production is interrupted in the middle to the state before the power interruption. For example, while backing up only data indicating the gaming state such as during BB, normal gaming state (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal”), or RT1 to RT3, an effect corresponding to the gaming state ( If a power interruption occurs during the execution of a specific performance (such as a small role announcement) other than the BB production during the BB and the normal production in the normal gaming state), it will be executed when the power is turned off the next time the power is turned on. Instead of resuming the specific effect that has been performed, the effect corresponding to the gaming state that is backed up when the power is turned on may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game ) And a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games is stored when the game state is controlled to end. In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled in the gaming state may be stored.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  When the mode is changed to the setting change mode (that is, when the setting change operation is performed), the gaming state flag is updated to information related to the normal gaming state described later in principle. Thus, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT or bonus, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the mode is changed to the setting change mode. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, when a transition is made to the setting change mode during the internal RT in which the bonus is won, the normal gaming state is controlled. In this way, in association with the setting change, the gaming state flag is rewritten to a value corresponding to the normal gaming state (initialization).

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and is performed when a change to the setting change mode is performed, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the in-use stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed when only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 7 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bets. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

[Winnings, transition of gaming state]
FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the main control unit 41 causes RT1 to RT3 and internal RT to be improved in the normal gaming state, and the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal gaming state. The bonus is controlled to either a big bonus or a regular bonus that improves the winning probability of a small role until a predetermined number of coins are paid out. In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 can control the effect state during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be performed. Yes.

  Referring to FIG. 5, three types of big bonuses 1 to 3 (hereinafter, each big bonus is also referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, regular bonus is also referred to as RB) are included in the special combination among the winning combinations. And are included.

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when a combination of “star 7-star 7-star 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB3, the big bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled to the big bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of BB won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, while being controlled by the big bonus, the RB is controlled to the RB for BB which has been improved to the predetermined probability of the small role. While being controlled to RB for BB, a regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the game is controlled so that the regular bonus medium flag is set to the ON state for each game.

  The big bonus generated due to winning of BB1 or BB2 ends on condition that 361 or more medals have been paid out. The big bonus generated due to the winning of BB3 ends on condition that 241 or more medals have been paid out.

  The RB is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Star 7” or “Star 7-Star 7-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. When winning an RB, the regular bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled by the regular bonus, the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. The regular bonus generated due to the winning of the RB is terminated on the condition that any winning combination is won four times.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game state is controlled to the inside RT from when BB1 to BB3 and RB are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, after BB1 to BB3 and RB are finished, the gaming state is controlled by RT1.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win the winning combination, the winning combination is won. There is nothing. The symbols constituting “BB1” to “BB3” and “RB” (“black 7”, “white 7”, “star 7”) are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Because. Note that when any of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won in the internal lottery, the winning flag of the bonus is carried over until the winning bonus is won.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combination includes a single combination, grape, melon 1 to melon 4, and strawberry.

  One of the small roles is awarded when a combination of “star-black BAR-black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out. Even if the winning combination is won, if the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing, no winning will be won. This is because the symbols (“star”, “black BAR”, and “black 7”) constituting a single winning combination are not arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R.

  Among the small roles, grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Even if the grapes are won, the grapes will not be won unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbols constituting the grape (“grape”) are not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R.

  Of the small roles, melon 1 is awarded when a combination of “any-melon-any” or “melon-black BAR-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. For this reason, the melon 1 can be awarded regardless of the combination of the symbols of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R when the symbol “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped and displayed on the effective winning line. It can be said that it is a winning role.

  Melon 1 wins regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R if they are elected. This is because the symbols constituting the melon 1 (for example, “melon”) are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C.

  Next, melons 2 to 4 will be described. Melon 2 is awarded when a combination of “white BAR−white 7−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Melon 3 wins when a combination of “white BAR-black BAR-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Melon 4 is awarded when a combination of “white BAR−black BAR−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, symbols constituting each of melons 2 to 4 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of melons 2 to 4 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, it will be won. Of the melons 2-4, you won't win the winning melon.

  However, as will be described later, melons 2 to 4 are always read out as a lottery winning combination at the same time as melon 1 except for the big bonus. For this reason, when the melons 2 to 4 are won, the melon 1 can be won except during the big bonus.

  It is also referred to as a fallen point where the symbol combination of melon 1 stops on the winning line L2. In other words, the falling roll means a roll that causes a melon 1 winning when the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops at the upper stage or the “melon-black BAR-melon” stops on the winning line L2. .

  As shown in FIG. 6, after a falling roll occurs in any of RT1 to RT3, the normal gaming state is controlled. Even if it falls in the inside RT, it is not controlled to the normal gaming state. In addition, even if a turnover occurs in the normal gaming state, the control to the normal gaming state is maintained.

  In addition, when the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops in the middle stage, the symbol combination of melon 1 stops on the winning line L1, and the outcome of winning the melon 1 and paying out 12 sheets is also called a chance outcome.

  Among the small roles, strawberry is one of the winning lines: “strawberry-white 7-banana”, “strawberry-black 7-banana”, “strawberry-star 7-banana”, and “strawberry-grape-banana” Wins when any combination is complete. Even if the strawberry is won, the strawberry will not win if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbol (“strawberry”) of the left reel 2L constituting the strawberry is not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L.

  When the player is in a general gaming state and is not controlled by the AT, the player can prevent the strawberry from being lost by performing a stop operation according to the operation procedure for winning the strawberry.

  Next, the number of medals to be paid out when winning one of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries will be described. When winning one of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries, medals are paid out according to the gaming state and the number of winning lines when the winning game is started.

  In the general game state, when a prize is awarded to any of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, when a prize different from grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries is won in a bonus different from the general gaming state, eight medals are paid out.

  The winning lines L1, L3, and L4 intersect at the middle stage of the middle reel 2C. Further, “any-melon-any” of melon 1 can be awarded only from the stop symbol of the middle reel 2C. Therefore, the melon 1 can be said to be a winning combination that can occur in a plurality of winning lines. For this reason, when the melon 1 wins melon 1 by stopping “any-melon-any”, the number of medals corresponding to the number of winning lines is paid out. For example, when the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped in the middle stage, in the general gaming state, the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 are won, so 4 × 3 = 12 medals are paid out and the bonus is won. Since winning is made on the lines L3 and L4, 8 × 2 = 16 and 12 medals at the upper limit of payout are paid out.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replay combination includes replay 1 to replay 11. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again. This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  Replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the normal replay (“banana”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 1 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won. Since Replay 1 is a normal replay that does not involve RT transition even when winning, and maintains the current gaming state, it is also referred to as a normal rep in the following.

  Replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay 2 (“banana”, “melon”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 2 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after winning the replay 2 in the normal gaming state, the RT2 is controlled to have a higher replay winning probability than the normal gaming state. For this reason, the replay 2 is also referred to as a promotion lip below. As will be described later, the replay 2 is set not to win in the internal lottery in RT1, and is set to win with a predetermined probability in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state. For this reason, no replay 2 is won in RT1. As a result, it is configured not to be directly controlled from RT1 to RT2, and is controlled to RT2 by winning the replay 2 after being controlled to the normal gaming state.

  It should be noted that even in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, RT1), the replay 2 can be drawn and won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%), and the gaming state other than the normal gaming state It may be configured to be controlled by RT2.

  Replay 3 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-white 7” or “banana-banana-strawberry” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The left symbol and the middle symbol (“banana”) constituting the replay 3 are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, and the right symbol (“white 7” and “strawberry” constituting the replay 3 are arranged. ") Is arranged within 5 frames in the right reel 2R. Therefore, as a general rule, the replay 3 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 6, after winning the replay 3 at RT2, the RT3 is controlled so that the replay winning probability is further improved as compared to RT2. For this reason, the replay 3 is also referred to as a rush lip below. As will be described later, the replay 3 is set not to win in the normal game state and the internal lottery in RT1, and is set to win in the internal lottery in RT2. For this reason, no replay 3 is won in the normal gaming state or RT1. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled directly from RT1 to RT3 from the normal gaming state, and is configured to be controlled by RT3 by winning the replay 3 after being controlled by RT2.

  It should be noted that even when the game state is other than RT2 (for example, the normal game state and RT1), the replay 3 can be selected and won by a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%), and the game other than RT2 You may comprise so that it may be controlled to advantageous RT from a state.

  Once controlled to RT3, the control to RT3 is maintained until a big bonus or regular bonus is won or a roll-out stop or a fall-off prize is generated.

  RT3 is not controlled unless a promotion lip is won in the normal gaming state and a rush lip is won in RT2. From this, when it is controlled to RT3, there is a high possibility that the navigation effect was executed because it was controlled during the AT described later. When the navigation effect is being executed during the AT, the operation is controlled from the RT2 or RT3 to the normal gaming state when controlled by the RT2 or RT3 by operating according to the operation procedure specified from the navigation effect. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a stop of a falling roll or a falling lip winning. However, even during the AT, if the player operates the wrong procedure due to an operational mistake, etc., there is a risk that the falling roll will stop or a falling lip prize may occur. It will be controlled from RT2 to the normal gaming state. In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, after falling into the normal gaming state (including after being controlled to RT2 from the normal gaming state) due to the stop of the falling roll or the falling lip winning while being in AT As will be described later, the number of AT games is subtracted. However, even if the player falls into the normal gaming state (including after being controlled by RT2 from the normal gaming state) due to the stop of the falling roll or the falling lip winning, even during AT, it falls into the normal gaming state. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the AT lottery will be performed by the same conditions established as in ART + AT3 until the game is completed, and the number of AT games will be increased.

  Replay 4 is awarded when a combination of “melon-strawberry-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay 4 (“melon” and “strawberry”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L to the right reel 2R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 4 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won. As shown in FIG. 6, when winning a replay 4 in RT2, it is controlled to the normal gaming state. For this reason, the replay 4 is also referred to as a falling lip below.

  Replay 5 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR−black BAR−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The replay 6 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-white 7” or “black BAR-black BAR-strawberry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay 7 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-white 7-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay 8 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-banana-black BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Replay 9 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The replay 10 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The replay 11 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-star” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  Since the replay 5 is a set of three black BARs, the replay 5 is also referred to as a BAR lip. Further, each of the replays 6 to 11 has two black BARs, that is, the black BARs are in a tempered state, and are also referred to as tempile a to tempile f.

  The symbols constituting each of the replays 5 to 11 include symbols that are not arranged within five frames in at least one or more reels. For this reason, even if one of the replays 5 to 11 is won in the internal lottery, no prize is won unless the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at an appropriate timing.

  However, since the replays 5 to 11 are won simultaneously with other replays, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the symbols constituting any of the selected replays can be drawn into the winning line. it can. Therefore, in principle, the replays 5 to 11 may be unable to win even if they are won, but can be said to be a role that can win any replay.

[Combinations of lottery roles]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the combination of the lottery object combination and the number of determination values read out as the lottery object role in the internal lottery will be described. In FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, “name of lottery subject” and “combination of lottery subject” corresponding to the name are shown by the left two columns, and “gaming state” is shown from the left third column. It is shown. The numerical value in the column where the lottery target role intersects with the gaming state indicates that the lottery target role is read in the internal lottery when the lottery target role is in the gaming state, and indicates the number of determination values used in the internal lottery of the lottery target role. 7 and 8, the number of determination values is, for example, the number of determination values when the setting value is 1, but the number of determination values when the setting value is 2 to 6 is also stored in the ROM 41b so that it can be specified. In addition, a cross in the column where the lottery target role and the gaming state intersect indicates that the lottery target role is not read in the internal lottery when the lottery target role is in the gaming state, or is not won even if read. .

  The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” in correspondence with a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “413” is set as the number of determination values (weak strawberry 1 in the normal gaming state in FIG. 7) is 413/65536.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, a plurality of winning combinations can be read simultaneously as lottery target combinations and can be won in duplicate. In the following, by indicating “+” between winning combinations, it indicates that they are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the lottery target combination and the number of determination values regarding the special combination / small combination in the general gaming state.

  When the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state and RT1 to RT3, weak strawberry 1, weak strawberry 2, weak strawberry 3, weak strawberry 4, strong strawberry 1, strong strawberry 2, strong strawberry 3, strong strawberry 4 Push order melon 1, Push order melon 2, Push order melon 3, Push order melon 4, Push order melon 5, 12 sheets melon 1, 12 sheets melon 2, 12 sheets melon 3, 12 sheets melon 4, weak grapes 1, Weak grape 2, weak grape 3, weak grape 4, strong grape 1, strong grape 2, strong grape 3, strong grape 4, one piece 1, one piece 2, one piece 3, one piece 4, RB, BB3, BB2, and BB1 are targeted for the internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as the targeted roles for the internal lottery.

  Weak strawberry 1 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry. The weak strawberry 2 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + RB. The weak strawberry 3 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + BB3. The weak strawberry 4 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + BB2. The strong strawberry 1 is a lottery target role for reading out a strawberry + 1 sheet role. The strong strawberry 2 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + 1 sheet role + RB. The strong strawberry 3 refers to a lottery target role for reading strawberry + 1 sheet role + BB3. The strong strawberry 4 is a lottery target role that reads strawberry + 1 sheet combination + BB2.

  The push order melon 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 4. The push order melon 2 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 3. The push order melon 3 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 2. The pushing order melon 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads out the melon 1. The pushing order melon 5 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 3 + melon 4.

  The 12-sheet melon 1 means a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry. The 12-sheet melon 2 refers to a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + RB. The 12-sheet melon 3 refers to a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + BB3. The 12-sheet melon 4 is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + BB2.

  The weak grape 1 is a lottery target role for reading grapes. The weak grape 2 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + RB. The weak grape 3 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + BB3. The weak grape 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + BB2. The strong grape 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out the grape + 1 combination. The strong grape 2 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 + 1 combination + RB. The strong grape 3 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 combination + BB3. The strong grape 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 sheet combination + BB2.

  One-piece combination 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out a single-piece combination. The one-piece combination 2 is a lottery target combination that reads out a single-piece combination + RB. The single winning combination 3 is a lottery target winning combination that reads out the single winning combination + BB3. The one-piece combination 4 is a lottery target combination that reads out the one-piece combination + BB2.

  When the game state is RT inside, weak strawberry 1, strong strawberry 1, push order melon 1, push order melon 2, push order melon 3, push order melon 4, push order melon 5, 12 sheets melon 1, weak grape 1, strong grape 1, and 1-sheet combination 1 are subject to internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as internal lottery target roles.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the lottery target combination and the number of determination values regarding the re-game combination in the general gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, normal replay, push order promotion replay 1, push order promotion replay 2, push order promotion replay 3, push order promotion replay 4, push order promotion replay 5, push order promotion replay 6, The BAR temporary play 1, the BAR temporary play 2, the BAR temporary play 3, the BAR temporary play 4, and the BAR replay are the targets of the internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as the target roles of the internal lottery.

  The normal replay refers to a lottery target role for reading a normal lip. The push order promotion replay 1 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + templipe e. The push order promotion replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + entry lip + temple lip e. The push order promotion replay 3 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + falling lip + temple lip e. The push order promotion replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + temp lip a + temp lip e. The push order promotion replay 5 is a lottery target combination that reads normal lip + promotion lip + temp lip b + temp lip e. The push order promotion replay 6 is a lottery target combination that reads out normal lip + promotion lip + templip lip c + temple lip e.

  The BAR temporary play 1 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + tempe lip a + tempe lip b + tempe lip c + tempe lip d + tempe lip e. The BAR temporary play 2 refers to a lottery target role for reading normal lip + templipa a + templipip b + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e + RB. The BAR temporary play 3 is a lottery target combination that reads out normal lip + tempe lip a + tempe lip b + tempe lip c + tempe lip d + tempe lip e + BB3. The BAR temporary play 4 is a lottery target combination for reading normal lip + templipa + tenpelipb + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e + BB2. The BAR replay is a lottery target combination that reads normal lip + BAR lip + templip lip a + templip lip b + templip lip c + temp lip d + temp lip e + temp lip f.

  When the gaming state is one of RT1, RT3, and internal RT, normal replay, BAR template play 1, BAR template play 2, BAR template play 3, BAR template play 4, and BAR replay are subject to internal lottery. These are sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT2, normal replay, push order maintenance replay 1, push order maintenance replay 2, push order maintenance replay 3, push order maintenance replay 4, push order maintenance replay 5, push order entry replay 1, push order entry Replay 2, Push Order Entry Replay 3, Push Order Entry Replay 4, BAR Temper Replay 1, BAR Temper Replay 2, BAR Temper Replay 3, BAR Temper Replay 4, and BAR Replay are subject to internal lottery and are subject to internal lottery. Read sequentially.

  The push order maintenance replay 1 is a lottery target role that reads promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintaining replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintaining replay 3 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + rush lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintenance replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + falling lip + templipa a + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e. The pushing order maintaining replay 5 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip b + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e.

  The push order rush replay 1 is a lottery target role that reads rush lip + falling lip. The push order rush replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading rush lip + falling lip + templip b. The push order rush replay 3 is a lottery target combination that reads rush lip + falling lip + templip lip c. The push order rush replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading rush lip + falling lip + templipa.

  Although not shown, when the RB is in the BB, the strawberry, the strong BB strawberry, the 12 melon 1, the BB melon, and the 8 melon are targeted for the internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as the roles for the internal lottery. . Here, the strawberry means a lottery target role for reading out the strawberry. The BB strong strawberry is a lottery target role for reading strawberry + melon 2. The 12-sheet melon 1 means a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry. The BB melon is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 3 + melon 4 + grape + 1 sheet combination. The eight-sheet melon is a lottery target for reading out the melon 1.

  When the gaming state is RB in the non-BB state, strawberry, left melon, middle right melon, 12-sheet melon 1, and strong grape 1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as target roles for internal lottery. The left melon is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + melon 3 + melon 4. The middle right melon is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + melon 2.

[Internal lottery]
Next, the internal lottery will be described in detail. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 2 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is permitted, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control for aligning with any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery is set so as to increase as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  Also, RB, BB2, and BB3 can be won at the same time as a small combination or a re-playing combination. For example, when winning a strawberry, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any one of RB, BB2, and BB3 is stronger than in strawberry 1 to 4 than when winning in any one of weak strawberries 1-4. The number of determination values for each of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the strong strawberries 1 to 4 is set so that the value when one of the four is won is higher. As will be described later, different reel control is performed when the weak strawberries 1 to 4 are won and when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 are won, so the player can select one of RB, BB2, and BB3 from the reel control contents. The possibility of winning simultaneously can be predicted.

  Moreover, when winning a grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 is higher than in the case of winning in any one of weak grapes 1-4. The number of determination values for each of the weak grapes 1 to 4 and the strong grapes 1 to 4 is set so that the value when one of the four is won is higher. As will be described later, since different reel control is performed when the weak grapes 1 to 4 are won and when the strong grapes 1 to 4 are won, the player can select one of RB, BB2, and BB3 from the reel control contents. The possibility of winning simultaneously can be predicted.

  In addition, when winning strawberry or grape, the percentage of winning simultaneously for RB, BB2, and BB3 is better when winning strawberry than when winning vine. The number of determination values is set so as to increase.

  In the general gaming state, as shown in FIG. 7, each of the push order melon 1 to the push order melon 5 is set to “2305”, and any one of the push order melon 1 to the push order melon 5 is 2305 × 5 / In order to win with a probability of 65536 = 111525/65536, the number of determination values is set so as to win with a higher probability than other lottery target roles.

  Next, paying attention to the number of determination values of the re-gamer in FIG. 8, the winning probabilities of the re-gamer are compared for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, “2734” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “1020” is determined as the number of determination values when any of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is read. “98” as the number of determination values when “1” is read, “8” as the number of determination values when one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read, and “4” as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read. "Is set. Therefore, the probability of winning any replay in the normal gaming state is 8980/65536. The probability of winning one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 that may be promoted to RT2 from the normal gaming state is 1020 × 6/65536 = 6120/65536.

  In RT1, “8856” is read as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is read as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read, and any one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values at that time, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read out. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT1 is 8982/65536. Note that RT1 is set so as not to win a promotion lip or a rushing lip for shifting to RT2 or RT3.

  In RT2, “715” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “6586” is determined as the number of determination values when any of the push order maintaining replays 1 to 5 is read. “3500” as the number of determination values when any one of 4 is read, “98” as the number of determination values when BAR template play 1 is read, and any of BAR template plays 2 to 4 being read “8” is set as the number of determination values, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT2 is 47771/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 and the push order entry replays 1 to 4 that may be dropped from RT2 to the normal gaming state is (6586 × 5) + (3500 × 4) / 65536 = 46930/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order rush replays 1 to 4 that may be entered from RT2 to RT3 is 3500 × 4/65536 = 14000/65536.

  In RT3, “47836” is read as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is read as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read, and any one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values at that time, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read out. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT3 is 47962/65536.

  In the internal RT, “17000” is set as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values when read, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT3 is 17126/65536.

  From these, in this embodiment, the probability of winning one of the replays is set to be higher when RT2, RT3, and internal medium RT than when in the normal gaming state, RT1. Yes. Therefore, it can be said that RT2, RT3, and internal RT are advantageous for the player in that the winning probability of replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state, RT1.

  In RT2, although the winning probability of replay is high, the winning probability of falling lip is also high. In addition, when the melon 1 is won, it can be a rollover. For this reason, it is difficult to maintain the RT2 when it is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, and to control the RT3 by winning the entry lip. On the other hand, RT3 is maintained in control of RT3 until a big bonus or regular bonus is won or until it falls. For this reason, it can be said that RT3 is an advantageous gaming state over RT2.

  In addition, when it is RT in the inside, it is set so that the winning probability of replay that is drawn preferentially over the bonus in the reel control is lower than that in RT3, etc. Compared with the case where the same replay winning probability is set, the ratio of winning the winning bonus can be increased.

  When it is RB in BB, the number of determination values is set so that the number of determination values of 12 melons 1 that will win melon 1 is won with high probability. In addition, a loss that does not win any winning combination is set to “12” and occurs with a very low probability. Further, when the RB is non-BB, the number of determination values of the left melon and the middle right melon including the melon 1 is set to win each with a high probability.

  When winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a storage area of 2 bytes, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work for which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set.

  Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

[Reel stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is also 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel. Therefore, symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, for example, It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn is set when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing positioned in the lower window of the perspective window 3). That is, for each symbol corresponding to the reel area number, the stop control table pulls in when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected when the symbol passes the stop reference position (lower stage). The number of frames can be specified.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. (For example, the lower symbol) is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred to, and the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames.

  Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel).

  That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  If a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as a strawberry) is won, or if a special role is won at the same time as a simultaneous winning role, the winning small role will be 4 frames on the winning line. The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 in the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn within the frame range is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range.

  That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  Next, in the case where a re-playing role is elected when the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won simultaneously, the winning re-playing role is placed on the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible in the range of four frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a plurality of types of re-game players are won simultaneously (for example, push order promotion replay 1), as shown in FIGS. Control is performed so that the determined re-playing combination is stopped on the winning line in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In the present embodiment, among the three left reels 2L to 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop. Further, in the present embodiment, the forward pressing refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 2C for the second time after first stopping the left reel 2L. Further, the forward clamping push means an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 2R for the second time after the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time. The middle left push refers to an operation procedure in which the left reel 2L is secondly stopped after the middle reel 2C is first stopped. The middle right push refers to an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 2R for the second time after stopping the middle reel 2C for the first time. The reverse pinching push refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 2L for the second time after stopping the right reel 2R for the first time. The reverse pressing refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 2C for the second time after stopping the right reel 2R for the first time.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won.

  For example, when the push forward promotion replay 1 is elected, if it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of the promoted rep in one of the winning lines in the winning replay. When the operation procedure is other than forward pressing, the normal lip combination is controlled so as to be aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order promotion replays 2 to 6 has been won, the player has been operated according to an operation procedure that is a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order promotion replay that has been won. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of promotion lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not in a predetermined order, the normal lip combination is set to any winning line. Control to stop them together.

  As described above, different operation procedures are set for each type of push-order promotion replay selected as the operation procedure for winning the promotion lip and promoting it to RT2. For this reason, even if one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won in the normal gaming state, the promotion replies have a probability of only 1/6 unless the type of the push order promotion replay that has been won can be specified. Can be prevented from being controlled by RT2, and a normal lip is awarded with a probability of 5/6 and the normal gaming state is maintained. As a result, when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, it is difficult to win the promotion lip so that it is not controlled to RT2 as much as possible, while when controlled by the AT, the promotion lip is awarded and controlled to RT2. Can be controlled.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reel control when one of the pressing order maintaining replays 1 to 5 is won.

  For example, when the push order maintaining replay 1 is won, and it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of promoted lips in one of the winning lines in the selected replay is stopped. When the operation procedure other than forward pressing is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling lip on any pay line.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order maintenance replays 2 to 5 is won, the player is operated according to an operation procedure in which a predetermined push order is determined according to the type of the push order maintenance replay being won. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of promotion lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not in a predetermined order, the combination of falling lip is set to any winning line. Control to stop them together.

  As described above, as the operation procedure for winning the promotion lip and maintaining RT2, and the operation procedure for causing the fall lip to win and fall into the normal gaming state, for each kind of the push order maintenance replay selected , Different operating procedures are set. Therefore, in RT2, when one of the push order maintenance replays is won, unless the type of the push order maintenance replay that has been won can be specified, the promotion lip is awarded only with a probability of 1/5. RT2 cannot be maintained, and a fall lip is won with a probability of 4/5, and the player falls into the normal gaming state. Thus, when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, even if controlled by RT2, it is easy to win the fall lip and control is performed so that the RT2 is not maintained as much as possible, while when controlled by the AT, It is possible to control so that the RT2 can be intentionally maintained by winning the promotion lip.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the push order rush replays 1 to 4 is won.

  For example, when the push forward rush replay 1 is won, and it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of the rush lip among the winning replays aligned with any winning line. When the operation procedure other than forward pressing is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling lip on any pay line.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order entry replays 2 to 4 is won, the player is operated in accordance with an operation procedure in a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order entry replay being won. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of the rush lip is aligned with one of the winning lines and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not performed in a predetermined order, the combination of the falling lip is set to one of the winning lines. Control to stop them together.

  As described above, as the operation procedure for making the entry lip enter a prize and entering the RT3, and the operation procedure for making the fall lip an entry and fall into the normal gaming state, for each type of push order entry entry replay selected , Different operating procedures are set. For this reason, when one of the push order rush replays is won in RT2, the rush lip is awarded only with a probability of 1/4 unless the type of the push order rush replay that has been won can be specified. It is configured to fall into the normal gaming state by winning a fall lip with a probability of 3/4. As a result, when it is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, it is difficult to win the entry lip so that it is not controlled to RT3 as much as possible. When the control is performed by the AT while being controlled so as not to be maintained, it is possible to control the RT 3 so that the rush lip is awarded.

  Further, when any one of the BAR temporary plays 1 to 4 is won, the winning line L1 to L4 and the lower stage of the reel 2L, the lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R while winning any of the selected replays. That is, reel control is performed in which two “black BARs” are aligned on any one of the lower lines extending over the symbols arranged in the lower stage.

  In addition, when BAR replay is won, within the range of the number of frames that can be drawn, the “black BAR” is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L4 and reel control is performed to win the BAR lip, and the BAR lip is won. If it is not possible to win, one of the winning lines L1 to L4 and the lower line will be selected in the same manner as when one of the BAR templey replays 1 to 4 is won while winning one of the winning replays. The reel control is performed so that two “black BARs” are aligned together.

  Next, when multiple types of small roles are won simultaneously (such as a strawberry + 1-number role), the small role with a large number of payouts has a reel control that is drawn into the winning line preferentially over the small number with a small number of payouts. Done.

  As a case where a plurality of types of small roles are simultaneously elected, for example, when any one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, as shown in FIG. Different reel control is performed according to the operation procedure.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the pushing order melons 1 to 5 is won.

  For example, when the push order melon 1 is won, and if it is operated according to the operation procedure of the forward push, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped in any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4. When the operation procedure is other than forward pressing, control is performed to stop the “melon” of the reel to be stopped in response to the stop operation. In other words, when the push order melon 1 is won and the operation procedure is followed by the push operation, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops at the three winning lines L1, L3, and L4, and a chance appears. Therefore, when 12 medals are paid out, when operated by an operation procedure other than forward pushing, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the winning line L2 and falls down. Therefore, only 4 medals are paid out, and when it is any one of RT1 to RT3, it is controlled to the normal gaming state. Also, when the push order melon 1 is won, and if it is operated according to the operation procedure of the forward push, the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R is stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages. On the other hand, when an operation procedure other than forward pressing is used, reel control is performed to stop the “melon” of the corresponding reel in the upper stage.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order melons 2 to 5 is won, it is similarly operated when the operation procedure is the predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order melon being won. Is one of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped, the chance control is performed, 12 medals are paid out, and the operation procedure other than the predetermined pushing order is performed. Is operated in the normal game state when the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the pay line L2 and controls to fall out and pays out four medals and is one of RT1 to RT3. Let me control.

  As described above, an operation procedure for stopping the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in any one of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 and paying out 12 medals, and advantageous control to RT2 and RT3. As an operation procedure for maintaining the above, a different operation procedure is set for each type of push order melon selected. For this reason, when one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 can only be 1/5 of the probability unless the type of the push order melon being won can be specified. One cannot stop paying out 12 medals by stopping the symbol combination of “Mellon-Mellon-Mellon”, and the “Melon” on the middle reel 2C is stopped only on the winning line L2 with a probability of 4/5. Only four medals are paid out, and the advantageous control to RT2 and RT3 cannot be maintained. As a result, when one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is selected, only four medals are paid out as much as possible when not controlled by the AT described later, and the advantageous control to RT2 or RT3 is maintained. When controlled by the AT, it is possible to intentionally stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4, and 12 medals are paid out and advantageous. Control can be performed to maintain control over RT2 and RT3.

  When one of the 12 melons 1 to 4 is selected, regardless of the operation procedure, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped at the three winning lines L1, L3, and L4, and the winning line L1, Reel control is performed in which the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped at either L3 or L4, and 12 medals are paid out.

  In FIG. 12, when operated in an operation procedure other than the pushing order for paying out 12 medals, it is only necessary to perform reel control for stopping “melon” in the upper stage for the middle reel 2 </ b> C. For example, the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R may be stopped at any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages. This makes it impossible to specify whether or not the pushing order is correct and whether or not 12 medals are to be paid out from the stop positions of the “melon” of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R. Interest can be improved.

  Next, the reel control when winning one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4, the strong strawberries 1 to 4, the weak grapes 1 to 4, and the strong grapes 1 to 4 will be described.

  For example, when any one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 or the weak grapes 1 to 4 is won, the combination of symbols constituting the winning strawberry or grape is selected within the winning line L2 Control to stop at any one of L4, that is, control to stop “strawberry” or “grape” at the upper or lower level as much as possible when focusing on the left reel 2L.

  On the other hand, when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 or the strong grapes 1 to 4 are selected, the symbol combination constituting the selected strawberries or grapes is stopped in the winning line L1 within the range of the number of drawn frames. Control, that is, control for stopping “strawberry” or “grape” in the middle as much as possible when focusing on the left reel 2L.

  As explained using FIG. 7, when winning a strawberry, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 wins in any of the weak strawberries 1-4. The number of judgment values for each of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the strong strawberries 1 to 4 is set to be higher than when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 are selected. When winning a grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any one of RB, BB2, and BB3 is stronger grapes 1-4 than when winning any one of weak grapes 1-4 The number of determination values for each of the weak grapes 1 to 4 and the strong grapes 1 to 4 is set so that the one when one of them is won is higher.

  For this reason, when strawberry or grape has won a prize, the “strawberry” or “grape” on the left reel 2L is stopped at the middle stage, rather than when it is stopped at the upper or lower stage, RB, BB2 , And BB3 are highly elected at the same time, so the player's expectation can be improved.

  Moreover, as demonstrated using FIG. 7, when winning a strawberry or grape, the ratio which is simultaneously elected in either RB, BB2, and BB3 is more than when winning a grape, The number of judgment values is set so that it is higher when winning a strawberry.

  For this reason, even when “Strawberry” or “Grape” on the left reel 2L stops at the middle stage and wins a strawberry or grape, the one when winning the strawberry is RB, BB2, and BB3. Since the ratio of winning simultaneously to either is high, the player's expectation can be improved.

  Next, the reel control when one of the left melon and the middle right melon is won in the non-BB RB will be described.

  For example, when the left melon is won and the left reel 2L is operated according to the operation procedure for stopping the left reel 2L, the winning line L1, L3, or L4 has a “melon-melon-melon” When the symbol combination is stopped and the operation is performed in accordance with an operation procedure for first stopping other than the left reel 2L, control is performed to stop the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L2. That is, when the left melon is won and the left reel 2L is operated in the first stop procedure, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops at the two winning lines L3 and L4. 12 is paid out, but when operated in the operating procedure that stops the reels other than the left reel 2L for the first time, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the winning line L2, so that 8 medals are paid out. Stay on.

  If the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is operated in the first stopping procedure when the middle right melon is elected, any one of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 is set to “melon- When the symbol combination of “melon-melon” is stopped and the left reel 2L is operated in the first stopping procedure, control is performed to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L2. In other words, when the middle right melon is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is operated according to the operation procedure for first stopping, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C becomes the two winning lines L3 and L4. In order to stop, twelve medals are paid out, but when operated by the operation procedure of first stopping the left reel 2L, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C stops only on the winning line L2, and thus the medal Will only be paid out.

  Thus, in the non-BB RB, as an operation procedure for stopping the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in any of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 and paying out 12 medals, Different operating procedures are set when you win the melon and when you win the middle right melon. For this reason, unless it is possible to specify whether the left melon is won or the middle right melon is won, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is placed on the winning line L1 only with a probability of 1/2. The medals cannot be paid out and 12 medals cannot be paid out, and the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the winning line L2 with a probability of 1/2 and only 8 medals are paid out. Yes. On the other hand, RB in non-BB is ended by winning four times. For this reason, according to the operation procedure in RB in non-BB, the net increase number in the said RB can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When one of the lottery winning combinations is won in the RB in the BB, reel control is performed to stop the drawing combination of winning combinations included in the lottery winning combination within the range of the number of drawable frames on the winning line. At that time, reel control is performed in which the winning combination included in the lottery target combination is stopped on the winning line L3 or L4 in preference to the winning line L2. For this reason, the symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped in preference to the winning line L3 or L4 over the winning line L2, and the symbol of the middle reel 2C in the symbol combination is stopped in the middle than the upper row. It will be.

[Processing by the main control unit 41]
Next, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first.

  In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When the processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7 to substantially change the game. BET processing for instructing the start is performed.

  If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. An internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery such as determining whether to perform or not is performed. In the internal lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag set in the RAM 41c according to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Further, in the internal lottery process, when one of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won, a process for controlling to the internal medium RT (for example, setting the value of the internal medium RT flag to the value of the game state flag). Done.

  When the internal lottery process ends, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor 32L is set on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. , 32C, 32R are driven, and rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. In normal times, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are rotated in a normal manner. In the present embodiment, as a normal mode, each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is driven to rotate at a predetermined acceleration at the same time until reaching a predetermined speed. Thereby, when it is rotationally driven in the normal mode, it is possible to start rotation of all of the left, middle, and right simultaneously and at a predetermined acceleration.

  When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R corresponding to the operated stop switches are stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. . The slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with respect to an example in which the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switch. For example, whether or not the stop switch has been operated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the reel rotation. Regardless of this, the rotating reel may be forcibly stopped.

  In the reel rotation process, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of reel rotation is transmitted to the effect control board 90 when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, and rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Each time, a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is transmitted to the effect control board 90 to determine which reel has been stopped.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the symbols shown in FIG. 5 is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. . If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed.

  In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command capable of specifying the presence / absence of the winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that any one of BB1 to BB3 and RB has been won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag is set) Etc.) are performed.

  Further, in the winning determination process in the normal gaming state, when it is determined that the promotion lip is won, a process for controlling to RT2 (for example, setting the value of RT2 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the winning determination process in RT2, when it is determined that a winning lip is won, a process for controlling to RT3 (for example, setting the value of RT3 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the winning determination process in RT2, when it is determined that the fall lip has been won, a process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. . Further, in the winning determination process, when it is determined in any of RT1 to RT3 that the melon 1 has won in a falling-out manner, a process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, the value of the gaming state flag is set). The normal gaming state value is set).

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9.

  Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 90. When the medal payout by winning and winning the credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus is performed as various processes not related to winning.

  In the bonus end determination process, when it is determined that the bonus end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to RT1 (for example, setting the value of the RT1 flag as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  In the payout process, the game state of the next game (RT1 to RT3, whether it is a normal game state, internal RT, BB, non-BB RB, etc.) ) That can specify a game state command is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In the payout process, a winning flag that does not carry over (a winning combination for a small combination or replaying combination) is deleted, and a winning flag for a bonus of BB or RB stored in a special work is not deleted. As a result, the bonus winning flag is carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the game control process, a freeze generation process is performed in which a freeze is generated by delaying the progress of the game over a predetermined period. The freeze generation process in the present embodiment is executed during the start of the game (for example, when the reel rotation process is started after the start switch 7 is operated and the internal lottery process is started) except during the bonus. Is done. The freeze generation process is not limited to the process that is executed at the start of the game, but may be executed at the end of the game, at the BET, at a predetermined timing during the reel rotation, or other than during the bonus The game may be executed not only in the game state but also in a specific game state such as during a bonus.

  When freezing does not occur, the main control unit 41 accelerates as soon as the reel starts rotating after the start of the game (reel rotation start), and when all reels reach a constant speed, The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the reels is validated. On the other hand, when the freeze is generated, the main control unit 41 does not validate the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to each reel until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game (reel rotation start). When the period elapses, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to each reel is validated to delay the progress of the game.

  In the freeze generation process, a process for performing a freeze effect by performing rotation control and stop control of the reels 2L to 2R in a mode (specific mode) different from the normal mode during a period in which the freeze is generated is performed. It is. The freeze effect will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that the period during which the freeze is generated only needs to delay the progress of the game, and may not execute the freeze effect by the reels 2L to 2R.

  In the freeze generation process, when a predetermined execution condition is established according to the winning situation in the internal lottery process, a freeze lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the freeze, and it is determined that the lottery is won Then, the control for setting the freeze state for a predetermined period is started. In the freeze generation process, when the control for setting the freeze state is started, a freeze command indicating that the control is set to the freeze state and the period during which the freeze control is performed is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Thereby, in the sub control part 91, it becomes possible to specify that the freeze has occurred by the main control part 41, and the effect corresponding to the freeze is executed.

  In the present embodiment, a freeze command is transmitted when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The predetermined execution condition is established according to the winning situation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the internal winning command and the freeze command are transmitted at the game start timing. Further, the reel rotation command in the case where the freeze occurs is transmitted at the timing when the rotation is shifted to the normal rotation control after the freeze is completed.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a freeze lottery table referred to in the freeze lottery. In the present embodiment, as a predetermined execution condition that becomes a freezing lottery opportunity, in a gaming state other than a bonus and other than internal RT, winning a grape or strawberry, winning a BAR temper play, winning a BAR replay It is stipulated to do. The predetermined execution conditions are not limited to those established by winning a predetermined winning combination, those established by winning a prize, those established when the number of games played reaches the predetermined number of games, It may be established with a predetermined probability by random number lottery.

  When a predetermined execution condition is established by winning the grape or strawberry, it is determined that the freeze is not executed with a probability of 99%, and the freeze execution is determined with a probability of 1%. Further, when a predetermined execution condition is established by winning the BAR template play, it is determined that the freeze is not executed with a probability of 80%, and the freeze execution is determined with a probability of 20%. Further, when a predetermined execution condition is established by winning the BAR replay, it is determined that the freeze is not executed with a probability of 30%, and the freeze execution is determined with a probability of 70%.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute the freeze, a freeze based on the decision is generated in the game in which the decision is made, in the next game, or in a game after the game is digested a predetermined number of times. It may be generated in a game won by a predetermined execution lottery. Further, even if it is determined to execute the freeze, a freeze based on the determination may be subsequently generated on the condition that the winning combination that triggered the determination is won.

  When freezing is determined in the freezing lottery and freezing is generated, the freezing command is output to the sub-control unit 91 as described above, and the progress of the game is delayed until a predetermined period elapses (for example, each reel). The operation of the corresponding stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not validated), and the progress of the game is resumed when a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to each reel is validated) To freeze).

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among RT1 to RT3, internal RT, normal game state, and bonus, and the progress of the game is indicated. In response, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

[Processing by sub-control unit 91]
Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done.

  Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are performed by displaying images on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sounds from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the gaming state applied in the game running on the gaming control board 40 side (The winning situation and the game state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining a symbol stopped as a display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, an array specifying table for specifying the symbol array in each reel of FIG. Referring to the specific table, stop symbol specifying processing for specifying a symbol stopped on the corresponding reel from information included in the reel stop command is performed, and the specified symbol is registered in the stop symbol table. Thereby, the symbol stopped as a display result can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends.

  In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 controls an effect state control process for controlling the effect state to a state having a high degree of advantage for a player such as an AT according to the game state or the like. A game effect execution process for executing a game effect or a navigation effect according to the state or the like is performed.

  The number of AT games acquired in the AT lottery of the effect state control process is notified at one timing or divided and notified at a plurality of timings. When the number of AT games is notified, control to the AT is started. The control to the AT is maintained until the number of AT games acquired from the next game won in the push forward entry replay, which is an opportunity to shift to RT3, according to the navigation effect is exhausted. If the number of AT games remains even after the AT + RT3 ART is controlled to the normal gaming state by stopping the falling roll or generating the falling lip prize, the AT is continued until the AT game number is consumed. This control is continued, and it becomes possible to control to ART again by performing a stop operation according to a navigation effect performed according to the number of remaining AT games. AT lottery is also held during ART. In addition, during the period from the time when ART is controlled (falling) to the time when it is controlled again by ART (AT + normal, AT + RT2), the AT lottery is performed in the same manner as during ART before falling. It is. Hereinafter, processing related to AT will be described.

[AT lottery processing]
The sub-control unit 91 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT by executing an AT lottery process included in the effect state control process. In the AT lottery process, it is determined based on a command from the main control unit 41 whether or not a predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied, and when the AT lottery is satisfied, the AT lottery is executed. In the AT lottery, the number of AT games indicating whether or not to control by the AT and the number of games that can be controlled by the AT is determined. Information for specifying the determined number of AT games is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. When the number of AT games is 0, the stored information in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c is updated to storage information for specifying the determined number of AT games. When the number of AT games is 1 or more, the number of AT games is updated. The stored information for specifying the number of games obtained by adding the determined number of AT games is updated. The AT is controlled while the number of AT games is consumed, and a navigation effect described later can be executed during the AT. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the number of AT games determined, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an example of an AT lottery condition that triggers the AT lottery. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of the AT lottery when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table referred to in the AT lottery. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table referred to in the preferential period shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the preferential period. The preferential period is a period in which the probability of winning an AT and the expected value of the number of AT games that can be expected to be obtained are large and advantageous for the player.

  As the AT lottery conditions, first to fifth conditions are set as shown in FIG. The AT lottery is performed when the AT lottery condition is satisfied. In the following, winning an AT lottery when the number of AT games has not been acquired and not in AT is referred to as AT first win or first win, and winning by AT lottery when the AT game number has already been acquired. This is called winning. When the winning combination is won, the determined number of AT games is added and added.

  The first AT lottery condition is when the game is in a state other than the bonus and other than the internal RT, and the winning situation where one of the grapes and strawberries is won, or the BAR template play 1 shown in FIG. It is established by becoming a winning situation in which any of -4 is won. In addition, when winning one of grapes, strawberries, and BAR tempura replays 1 to 4 but receiving a freeze command for generating a freeze by winning the freeze lottery on the main control unit 41 side. The first AT lottery condition is not satisfied, and the fifth AT lottery condition described later is satisfied. In other words, the first AT lottery condition is satisfied when any of grape, strawberry, and BAR template play 1 to 4 is won and no freeze occurs due to the winning. Note that the opportunity for establishing the first AT lottery condition may be established by winning a predetermined combination instead of winning a predetermined combination. For example, a grape or strawberry wins in the winning line L1 (that is, a grape or strawberry wins in the middle stage), or two “black BARs” are arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L4 and the lower line, and the BAR Lip is a temper. It may be established by this.

  The AT lottery when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied is executed with reference to a table corresponding to the set mode type. Depending on the type of mode, the probability of determining to control to AT in the AT lottery and the allocation rate of the number of AT games are specified. In the present embodiment, mode A and mode B are provided. For example, during demonstration production, the player can select an operation by operating the operation means such as the stop switches 8L to 8R and the MAXBET switch 6. The sub-control unit 91 controls the mode according to the operation selection.

  Note that the mode is not limited to two types of mode A and mode B, but may be provided with three or more types, and is not limited to a mode that can be selected by the player, It may be determined randomly by lottery using random numbers on the part 91 side.

  Further, for example, the mode B is controlled during the 50 games from the end of BB1 in the bonus, and the mode A is controlled after the 50 games are consumed, and a predetermined condition is established when the mode A is in effect. As a result, a mode lottery for randomly determining whether or not to control the mode B using a random number or the like is performed. The mode is controlled to the mode B, and after the mode B is finished, the mode A is controlled again. The sub-control unit 91 may perform any mode by performing a predetermined mode setting process according to the establishment condition. When a bonus is won while in mode B, regardless of the number of games consumed in the mode B and the type of bonus won, the mode B is controlled for 50 games after the bonus ends. You may do it. The mode may be set based on the date and time counted by the RTC.

  Referring to FIG. 15A, in the AT lottery when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied, the first table shown in FIG. Reference is made to the second table shown in FIG.

  When the first table is referenced, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), it is determined that the AT first win or non-winning will not be elected with the probability of 50%, and the remaining 50% probability will be the first AT winning or extra win. It is decided to win. When winning the AT lottery, the number of AT games is 20% with a probability of “10 games”, 12% with a probability of “20 games”, 7% with a probability of “30 games” and 5% with a probability of 5%. “40 games” with 3% probability “50 games”, 1% probability “100 games”, 1% probability “150 games”, 1% probability “200 games” Is done.

  The expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired in the AT lottery when the first table is referenced is (0.2 × 10) + from the relationship between the allocation rate and the number of AT games that can be determined. (0.12 × 20) + (0.07 × 30) + (0.05 × 40) + (0.03 × 50) + (0.01 × 100) + (0.01 × 150) + (0 .01 × 200) ≈14.5.

  When the second table is referred to, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the winning is determined with a probability of 85.8%, and the remaining probability is determined to be a winning that is an AT first win or an extra winning. When winning the AT lottery, the number of AT games is 2% with a probability of 30%, 0.8% with a probability of 40 games, 5% with a probability of 50%, and 2%. The probability is determined as “100 games”, 1.4% as “150 games”, 1% as “200 games”, and 2% as “250 games”.

  When the second table is referenced, it is less likely to win the first AT or extra win than when the first table is referenced, but when the first AT or extra winning is won, the number of games is larger as the number of AT games. It is set to be able to be determined as “250 games” that are not determined when the first table is referred to.

  Further, the expected value of the number of AT games expected to be obtained in the AT lottery when the second table is referred to is (0.02 × 30) from the relationship between the distribution rate and the number of AT games to be determined. ) + (0.008 × 40) + (0.05 × 50) + (0.02 × 100) + (0.014 × 150) + (0.01 × 200) + (0.02 × 250) ≈ 14.5, which is set to be substantially the same as the expected value of the number of AT games when the first table is referred to. Accordingly, it is possible to provide an interest in which mode to select without causing a difference in the substantial advantage for the player.

  Note that the expected value of the number of AT games may be set to be exactly the same in the first table and the second table. Further, the expected value of the number of AT games is set so that one of the first table and the second table is larger than the other, for example, the second table is larger than the first table. It may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the second AT lottery condition is satisfied by winning the BAR replay when the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal RT. In addition, when the BAR replay is won, the second AT lottery condition is not satisfied when a win command is received to the effect that the win is generated in the freeze lottery on the main control unit 41 side. First, a fifth AT lottery condition to be described later is satisfied. That is, the second AT lottery condition is satisfied when the BAR replay is won and no freezing occurs due to the winning. Note that the second AT lottery condition is established not by winning the BAR replay but by the BAR lip symbol combination being stopped and winning in any of the winning lines L1 to L4. Also good.

  In the AT lottery when the second AT lottery condition is satisfied, the third table is referred to regardless of the mode, as shown in FIG. When the third table is referred to, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), the winner is always won, that is, the first AT win or the extra winner. In the AT lottery with reference to the third table, the number of AT games is “10 games”, “20 games”, “30 games”, “40 games”, “50 games”, “150 games”, “200 games”. , And “250 games” are determined with a probability of 10%, and the remaining 20% are determined as “100 games”.

  The expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired in the AT lottery when the third table is referred to is 0.1 × (10 + 20 + 30 + 40 + 50 + 150 + 200 + 250) +0 from the relationship between the allocation rate and the number of AT games that can be determined. .2 × 100≈95. That is, when the third table is referred to, the AT lottery is performed in a manner that is more advantageous to the player than when the first or second table is referenced. For this reason, it can be said that the second AT lottery condition is an AT lottery condition that is more advantageous for the player than the first AT lottery condition.

  The sub-control unit 91 specifies whether the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal medium RT based on, for example, the internal winning command or the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and the internal winning command ( When the AT lottery condition is established by winning, whether or not the first or second AT lottery condition is established is specified based on a reel stop command and a winning determination command.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the third AT lottery condition is satisfied every time the game is started in the preferential period when the game state is other than the bonus and other than the internal RT. Note that the third AT lottery condition is not limited to each game being established during the preferential period, but is established when a predetermined winning combination is won or won in the preferential period, or when a predetermined lottery is won. It may be.

  During the preferential period, if a win is made in the preferential period shift lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the preferential period, the preferential period is transferred until the predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) is consumed. The preferential period shift lottery is performed with reference to the preferential period shift lottery table shown in FIG. 17 when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied but the AT lottery is not won.

  In the preferential period transition lottery table, the preferential period transition probability is set so that the preferential period transitions at a different rate depending on the state when the win is not won in the AT lottery (specifically, the preferential period transition probability becomes the preferential period transition probability) Is set to the number of judgment values).

  If the winning state is a non-AT state, a normal gaming state, or RT2, it is determined that the preferential period is shifted with a probability of 10%. On the other hand, when it is during non-AT and RT3, or during AT, it is determined to shift to the preferential period with a probability of 30%. For this reason, even when it is not won, the preferential period transition lottery is higher when it is during non-AT + RT3 or AT than when it is in non-AT + normal or non-AT + RT2 The winning period is shifted to a preferential period until the player wins the game and consumes a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). Therefore, during non-AT + RT3 or during AT, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for shifting to a preferential period, and it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the number of AT games will be increased during the preferential period. . It should be noted that “at AT” shown in FIG. 17 may be in a state controlled by the AT, and not only when the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 is RT3, but also in the normal gaming state or RT2 Is also included.

  Although the preferential period shift lottery in the present embodiment has been described as being performed when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied but not won in the AT lottery regardless of whether or not the AT is being performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be performed only during the AT. For example, the preferential period transition lottery may be performed when the number of AT games has already been acquired and the AT is controlled and the first AT lottery condition is satisfied but the AT lottery is not won. Good.

  In addition, although the preferential period shift lottery in the present embodiment has been described as an example performed when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied but is not won in the AT lottery, the lottery is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be performed when a predetermined condition is established, such as winning or winning a predetermined winning combination. For example, the preferential period shift lottery may be performed when winning (or winning) one of grape, strawberry, and BAR template play. In this case, the preferential period transition probability may be varied depending on which one of the grape, strawberry, and BAR template play is won (or won), that is, depending on the type of the predetermined condition established.

  Moreover, although the preferential period transition lottery in the present embodiment has been described with respect to an example in which a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not it is during an AT, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Even at times, it may be performed on condition that it is during AT. For example, the preferential period shift lottery is performed when the first AT lottery condition is satisfied but the AT lottery is not won when the number of AT games has already been acquired and controlled by the AT. Also good. Also in this case, the preferential period transition probability may be made different according to the opportunity for the preferential period transition lottery.

  When the preferential period is entered, the value of the preferential period game number counter is incremented by 1 in order to specify the number of games that have been consumed in the preferential period, and the number of games corresponding to the predetermined number of games ( The preferential period is terminated by reaching 10). In addition, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not the third AT lottery condition is satisfied based on, for example, receiving an internal winning command from the main control unit 41 when the preferential period is entered. .

  In the AT lottery when the third AT lottery condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 15B, the final game (tenth game) in the preferential period or a game other than the final game (first to ninth games) ), An AT lottery is performed according to different ratios. Whether or not it is a final game is specified based on the value of the preferential period game number counter described above.

  When the game is a game other than the final game in the preferential period, the number of AT games is determined to be “10 games” with a probability of 80% and “20 games” with a probability of 20%. Therefore, the expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired in the AT lottery when the game is other than the final game in the preferential period is 0.8 based on the relationship between the distribution ratio and the number of AT games that can be determined. × 10 + 0.2 × 20≈12.

  On the other hand, when it is the final game in the preferential period, the number of AT games is changed to “10 games” with a probability of 50%, “20 games” with a probability of 30%, and “30 games” with a probability of 20%. It is determined. Therefore, the expected value of the number of AT games expected to be obtained in the AT lottery when it is the final game in the preferential period is 0.5 × 10 + 0. 3 × 20 + 0.2 × 30≈17.

  In this way, during the preferential period, the number of AT games determined by winning an AT for each game is added. Further, the expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired by shifting to a preferential period over 10 games is 12 × 9 + 17 = 125. For example, refer to the third table shown in FIG. It becomes larger than the expected value of the number of AT games in all AT lotteries. For this reason, during the preferential period, AT lottery is performed so that it is more advantageous for the player than when it is not the preferential period.

  Further, even during the preferential period, the expected value of the number of AT games is set to be larger in the final game than in a game other than the final game. For this reason, expectation for the final game during the preferential period can be enhanced. Note that the timing at which the expected value of the number of AT games increases during the preferential period is not limited to the final game, but may be any timing set after a predetermined timing such as the fifth game.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the fourth AT lottery condition is a gaming state other than the bonus and other than the internal RT, and the number of AT games is notified (when the subtraction of the number of AT games is started). This is established by winning a normal replay (a normal lip-only lottery role). That is, the fourth AT lottery condition does not hold even if the normal replay is won until the AT is won and the number of AT games is notified, but after the AT is won and the number of AT games is notified. It is established by winning a normal replay. The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied, for example, based on whether or not the normal replay is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41 during the AT game number notification. Is identified.

  In the AT lottery when the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 15C, the gaming state when the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied is the normal gaming state, RT2, and RT3. Depending on which is the AT lottery is performed according to a different ratio.

  “100 games” with a probability of 1.19% in the normal gaming state, “100 games” with a probability of 4.58% when RT2, and “100 games” with a probability of 0.0685% when RT3 Is determined as the number of AT games.

  In the normal replay that triggers the establishment of the fourth AT lottery condition, even if the winning is performed at a different rate depending on the gaming state and the fourth AT lottery condition is established by the normal replay winning, Winning at different rates. However, in any gaming state, the expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired in the AT lottery when the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied per game is substantially the same as described below. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the probability that the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied by winning the normal replay (the normal lip-only lottery target role) is 2734/65536 in the normal gaming state, 715/65536 in RT2, and in RT3. It is set to be 47836/65536. In addition, the probability of winning an AT when the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied is as shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired in the AT lottery when the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied per game is 2734/65536 × 0.0119 × 100≈0. 0496, 715/65536 × 0.0458 × 100≈0.0499 at RT2, and 47836/65536 × 0.000685 × 100≈0.0499 at RT3, which are substantially the same. For this reason, by spending 100 games during an AT, the number of AT games is increased by an average of 5 games regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even if ART ends and only the AT state is reached, the expected value for the number of added games does not change, so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the fifth AT lottery condition is established when a freezing command is received from the main control unit 41 and the occurrence of the freezing is specified in a gaming state other than the bonus and other than the internal RT. . In the present embodiment, when the freeze command is received during the preferential period, the fifth AT lottery condition is established instead of the third AT lottery condition, but the third AT lottery condition is satisfied instead of the fifth AT lottery condition. May be established.

  In the AT lottery when the fifth AT lottery condition is satisfied, the fourth table is referred to as shown in FIG. FIG. 16D is a diagram for explaining the fourth table. When the fourth table is referred to, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), it is always determined that the winning is an AT first win or an extra winning. The number of AT games is “50 games” with a probability of 5%, “100 games” with a probability of 5%, “150 games” with a probability of 10%, “200 games” with a probability of 20%, It is determined as “250 games” with a probability of 60%.

  The expected value of the number of AT games expected to be acquired in the AT lottery when the fourth table is referenced is (0.05 × 50) + from the relationship between the allocation rate and the number of AT games to be determined. (0.05 × 100) + (0.1 × 150) + (0.2 × 200) + (0.6 × 250) = 212.5, the number of AT games than when any table is referenced The expected value is set to be large.

  In addition, when the fifth AT lottery condition established when the freeze occurs is established, 250 games, which is the upper limit of the number of AT games that can be won in the AT lottery at a higher rate than when other AT lottery conditions are established. It is set to be determined. Therefore, as a result, when the upper limit of 250 games is determined, freezing occurs at a higher rate than when the upper limit is determined to be less than 250 games.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the AT lottery condition is satisfied is determined by the AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the AT lottery condition is satisfied, the AT lottery is performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 specifies the number of unreported games for specifying the number of AT games that are the number of games that can be controlled by the AT and are not yet reported when the AT first wins in the AT lottery. Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The acquired number of AT games is notified by dividing into one or a plurality of times by an AT game number notification process described later. When the game won for the push-in rush replay, which becomes the control trigger for RT3, is completed after the AT first hit (regardless of whether or not the rush lip was won and controlled by RT3 in the game) In addition, the number of AT games determined to be notified is notified, and the number of AT games determined to be notified in the game when it is already in RT3 (including RT3 after the AT ends) or during a preferential period is notified. Then, the number of AT games is subtracted from the next game.

  When notified by the AT game number notification process, the sub-control unit 91 updates the number of unreported games obtained by subtracting the notified number of games to the unreported game number information. For example, when information on the number of unreported games for specifying “30 games” is stored and information on “20 games” is notified, the information is updated to information on the number of unreported games for specifying “10 games”. Is done.

  In addition, when the number of unreported AT games remains from the number of unreported games, and the winning lottery in the AT lottery again, that is, when the winning combination is won, the number of unannounced AT games specified from the unreported game number information is The number of acquired AT games is added and updated to the unreported game number information for specifying the number of games. For example, when information on the number of unreported games for specifying “30 games” is stored, if it is determined to be “20 games” by adding and winning in the AT lottery, 30 + 20 = 50, and “50 games”. Is updated to the information on the number of unreported games for identifying the game.

[AT game number notification process]
The sub-control unit 91 sets and notifies the number of games within the range of the number of unreported AT games by executing the AT game number notification process included in the effect state control process, and in response to the digestion of one game This is done by displaying one subtraction at a time. The notification of the number of games in the present embodiment is performed, for example, by displaying on a predetermined display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and is displayed by subtraction one by one when one game starts (or when one game ends). The

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart for explaining the AT game number notification process executed by the sub-control unit 91. The AT game number notifying process is executed, for example, when one game is started in a gaming state other than the bonus and other than the internal medium RT.

  In the AT game number notification process, it is determined in S01 whether or not the number of unreported games is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is a number of unreported games, based on the number of unreported games. When an AT first win or extra winning is selected in the AT lottery, there will always be an unreported game number. When it is determined in S01 that the number of unreported games is 0, the process proceeds to S15, and when it is determined that the number of unreported games is greater than 0, the process proceeds to S02.

  In S02, it is determined whether or not the AT first hit. That is, any one of the first to third AT lottery conditions that can be established even during non-AT is established and the AT lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the AT first hit in the AT lottery. When it is determined in S02 that the AT first hit, in S03, with reference to the initial hit table shown in FIG. 19A, the number of games to be notified for the first time within the range of the number of acquired AT games (hereinafter referred to as the following) (Also referred to as the number of initial games), and the process proceeds to S10, where the number of remaining games after subtracting the number of first games determined this time from the number of unreported games is updated to unreported game number information for specifying the number of remaining games.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S02 that the AT does not win for the first time, it is determined in S04 whether or not an extra lottery was performed in the AT lottery performed when the AT lottery condition was satisfied during the AT. That is, one of the first to fifth AT lottery conditions is satisfied and the AT lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not an extra lottery is won in the AT lottery. When it is determined in S04 that the winning is added, in S05, with reference to the additional time table shown in FIG. 19 (b), the number of games to be notified of the addition within the range of the number of unreported AT games (hereinafter referred to as an additional game). (Also referred to as a number), the process proceeds to S10, and the number of additional games determined to be notified this time is subtracted from the number of unreported games, and updated to unreported game number information for specifying the number of remaining games.

  If it is determined in S04 that the winning combination is not won, in S06, the number of currently notified notification games is 1 and the game started from now is 0 even though there is an unreported number of AT games. It is determined whether or not a situation occurs (that is, a situation where the number of games displayed in S16 described later becomes 0). When it is determined in S06 that the number of informed games (the number of AT games currently informed) is 1, in S07, the end time table shown in FIG. The number of added games to be notified is determined, and the process proceeds to S10 to determine the remaining number of games after subtracting the number of added games determined to be notified this time from the number of unreported games. Update to

  When it is determined in S06 that the number of notification games is not 1, it is determined in S08 whether or not a predetermined winning situation is determined in advance. The specific winning situation determined in advance refers to a situation where one of the grapes, strawberries, BAR templey replays 1 to 4 and BAR replay is won, and a situation where none of the winning positions is won. . Therefore, in S08, it is determined whether or not the internal lottery situation of the game started from now is a specific winning situation.

  If it is determined in S08 that the number of AT games is currently being notified and that a predetermined winning situation is determined in advance, in S09, an unnotified AT is referred to with reference to the specific time table shown in FIG. Within the range of the number of games, the number of additional games to be notified is determined, and the process proceeds to S10 to determine the remaining number of games after subtracting the number of additional games determined this time from the number of unreported games Update to number information. When it is determined in S08 that the predetermined winning situation is not determined in advance, the process proceeds to S11.

  In S11, it is determined in any one of S03, S05, S07, and S09 whether or not the number of initial games or the number of added games has been determined. If it is determined in S11 that it has not been determined, the process proceeds to S15.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that it has been determined, a game number notification effect corresponding to the determined initial game number or added game number is set in S12. The number-of-games notification effect for informing the number of first-time games is preferential treatment when the game won in the push-in rush replay that becomes the control trigger for RT3 is completed or when it is already in RT3 (including RT3 after AT end). When it is a period, it is performed when the game ends. For example, when “50 games” is determined as the first game number, a character is displayed as a game number notification effect, and a predetermined message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and then “AT winning! 50 games won!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, followed by a message such as “50 games remaining” in the upper right area, and a message such as “AT start” in the center of the screen.

  The game number notification effect for notifying the number of added games is performed at a timing according to the progress of the game. When “30 games” is determined as the number of added games, a character is displayed and a predetermined message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a game number notification effect, and then a message such as “Add 30 games!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Displayed on the device 51. For example, when “30 games” is determined as the number of additional games, a character is displayed as a game number notification effect, and a predetermined message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and then a message such as “+30 games” is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Next, a message for specifying the number of remaining games with the added number of games added is displayed in the upper right area. The timing according to the progress of the game when winning the extra is the extra time during the ART after the first AT hit or during the preferential period means when the extra winning game ends. Also, during the ART after the first AT hit, it is controlled from AT + normal by falling lip winning or stop of the fallout, etc., until it is controlled again by RT3 to shift to ART (that is, AT + normal after fall or AT + RT2) The timing according to the progress of the game for the extra portion during a special period such as during the period is the ART when the number of notification games becomes zero or when the number of notification games is shifted to ART again until the number of notification games becomes zero. When it was transferred to. The timing according to the progress of the game when the number of notification games becomes 1 or when a specific winning situation is reached means when the game is finished.

  In the game number notification effect, the number of games determined to be notified is notified at a timing of 1. However, the game number notification effect is not limited to this as long as the number of games determined to be notified is notified as a result. The number-of-games notification effect is, for example, from the last game stoppage or the betting number setting operation for the current game until the betting number setting operation for the next game is performed (by the betting number setting operation for the next game) Is executed within a predetermined period of time (including the period until the production ends), the number of games determined to be notified is divided into a plurality of timings (for example, at the first stop, at the second stop, Notification may be made separately at the time of the third stop, when setting the number of bets for the next game, and the like.

  The number of games determined to be notified is divided into a plurality of timings within a predetermined period, and the number of games determined to be notified (for example, 50 games) is divided into A, B, and C (for example, A to B). C may be the same number of games, or may be 10, 15, 25 so as to increase in steps), and A is notified when the first stop operation is performed Then, B may be notified when the second stop operation is performed, and C may be notified when the third stop operation is performed.

  Further, a plurality of types of messages issued from the character displayed as the game number notification effect are provided. For example, when the freeze occurs after that, the message of the first mode (“I did” shown in FIG. 23 (l) described later) is selected at a higher rate than the case where the freeze does not occur.

  Further, even when the number of AT games is not notified (including an additional notification), the same character as the character displayed as the game number notification effect is displayed and a message is displayed. In this case, when the number of AT games is subsequently notified (including an additional notification), the message of the second mode (see FIG. 23 described later) is higher than when the number of AT games is not notified (including an additional notification). “Chance may” shown in (p)) is selected. On the contrary, when the number of AT games is not subsequently notified (including an additional notification), the message of the third mode (for example, “ Depends on luck ") is selected. Thereby, from the message issued from the character to be displayed, it is possible to vary the expectation that the freeze will occur afterwards and that the number of AT games will be notified thereafter, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  Note that the aspect of the game number notification effect is not limited to such an aspect, and may be any aspect as long as the player can specify the number of games that can be controlled by the AT. Further, the game number notification effect is not limited to the one displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  In S13, the notification game number information for specifying the notified number of games is updated. For example, when “50 games” is determined as the initial number of games, information game number information for specifying 50 is set, and when “30 games” is determined as the number of additional games, When the number of notification games specified from the notification game number information is “28”, the information is updated to the notification game number information for specifying 30 + 28 = 58. From the notification game number information, the number of games notified on the liquid crystal display 51 can be specified. The notification game number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c.

  In S14, the initial game number or the added game number determined in any of S03, S05, S07, and S09 is reset, and the process proceeds to S15.

  In S <b> 15, it is determined whether or not the number of informed games that is not based on RT <b> 1 and is informed based on the informed game number information is greater than zero. In S15, when it is determined that it is RT1 or the number of notification games is 0 (or is not notified), the AT game number notification processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S15 that it is not RT1 and the number of notification games is greater than 0, in S16, the notification game number information is updated by 1 so that the number of notification games is subtracted by one. At the same time, the value of the number of notification games displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed with 1 subtraction, and the AT game number notification processing is terminated. Note that when the preferential period is shifted to, the notification game number information may not be updated by one subtraction. In other words, during the preferential period, instead of or in addition to what is advantageous in the AT lottery, the number of AT games may not be consumed so that it is advantageous for the player.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, control to the AT is continued even after falling into the normal gaming state due to the stop of the falling roll or the falling lip winning while being in AT, and YES in S15 As a result of the determination, the number of notification games is decremented by one. Even after the ART is once controlled to the normal gaming state, not only the first to third and fifth AT lottery conditions but also the fourth AT lottery condition is satisfied, and the AT lottery is performed. The number of AT games is added and added accordingly. Even after the ART is once controlled to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 17, the preferential period shift lottery is performed in an advantageous manner.

  FIG. 19 is a table that is referred to in the AT game number notification process, and is a diagram for explaining a table used for determining the number of initial games or the number of additional games to be notified within the range of the number of unreported AT games. It is.

  FIG. 19A shows an initial hit table. The initial hit table is a distribution rate for determining the number of first games depending on what the game progress status is and whether the number of unreported games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games. Is stipulated.

  First, the case where the progress of the game is shifted to the preferential period or during RT3 after the end of AT will be described. When the number of unreported AT games is less than 40 games, the distribution ratio is set so that “the number of unreported games” is always determined as the number of first games to be reported with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of unreported AT games is “40 to 200 games”, “the number of unreported games” is notified with an 80% probability, and “40 games” is notified with a 20% probability. The distribution rate is determined so that the number of first games is determined. Further, when the number of unannounced AT games is 250 games, which is the upper limit of the number of AT games that can be won in the AT lottery, the number of initial games to be notified of “the number of unannounced games” is always determined with a probability of 100%. As shown, the distribution rate is set.

  Next, the case where the progress of the game is neither the preferential period nor the RT3 after the AT is finished will be described. When the number of unannounced AT games is less than 40 games, “the number of unannounced games” has a probability of 60%, “10 games” has a probability of 20%, and “20 games” has a probability of 20%. The distribution ratio is set so that the number of initial games to be notified is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of unreported AT games is “40 to 200 games”, “the number of unreported games” has a probability of 10%, “10 games” and “20 games” have a probability of 18%. The distribution ratio is determined such that any one of “30 games”, “40 games”, and “50 games” is determined as the number of initial games. Further, when the number of unannounced AT games is 250, which is the upper limit of the number of AT games that can be won in the AT lottery, “the number of unannounced games” with a probability of 80% is “50 games with a probability of 20%”. Is determined so that the number of initial games to be notified is determined.

  As a result, when the progress status of the game is shifted to the preferential period or during RT3 after the end of the AT, it is determined as “number of unreported games” at a higher rate than when it is not, and acquired. The number of played AT games can be notified at one timing without being divided. Further, even when the progress of the game is shifted to the preferential period or during the RT3 after the end of the AT, if the number of unreported AT games is less than 40, the number of unreported games is always The number of acquired AT games can be notified at one timing without being divided.

  In addition, when the progress of the game is not in the preferential period nor during the RT 3 after the end of AT, when the number of unannounced AT games is large, the number of unannounced AT games is small and it is relatively difficult to divide and inform in a divided manner The distribution ratio is set so that it is easier to divide and notify at a higher rate than when it is.

  In addition, when 250 games, which is the upper limit of the number of AT games that can be won in the AT lottery, are determined, the number of AT games acquired is determined to be “number of unreported games” at a higher rate than when it is not. Notification can be made at one timing without division. In particular, when the progress status of the game is shifted to the preferential period or during RT3 after the end of the AT, when it is determined that the upper limit of 250 games that can be won in the AT lottery, the “unreported game” It can be notified at one timing without dividing the number of acquired AT games.

  FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining the extra table. The extra time table is based on the progress of the game and whether or not the number of games determined to be added by the extra winning (the number of additional games this time) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games. A distribution ratio for determining the number of additional games is set.

  First, a description will be given of a case where the progress of the game is shifted to a preferential period, or during AT + normal or AT + RT2. When the number of added games this time is less than 40 games, the allocation rate is set so that “the number of added games this time” is always determined as the number of added games to be notified with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of additional games this time is “40 to 200 games”, an additional game in which “the number of additional games this time” has a probability of 80% and “40 games” has a probability of 20%. As determined by the number, the distribution rate is determined. In addition, when the number of added games this time is 250 games which is the upper limit that can be won in the AT lottery, the allocation is made so that “the number of unreported games” is always determined as the number of first games to be notified with a probability of 100%. The rate is set.

  The number of games determined to be notified when the progress of the game is controlled by AT + normal or AT + RT2 controlled by an operation error in ART may be notified at the determined timing, or You may comprise so that it alert | reports when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of currently notified games reaches 0, or when the number of games reaches 0 and is controlled by RT3 and again by ART. May be.

  Next, a case where the progress of the game is neither preferential period nor during AT + normal or AT + RT2 will be described. When the number of additional games this time is less than 40 games, “the number of additional games this time” is reported with a probability of 60%, “10 games” with a probability of 20%, and “20 games” with a probability of 20%. The distribution rate is set so that the number of added games is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of additional games this time is “40 games” or more, “the number of additional games this time” has a probability of 10%, and “10 games”, “20 games”, “ The distribution ratio is determined such that any one of “30 games”, “40 games”, and “50 games” is determined as the number of additional games to be notified. In addition, when the number of added games is 250, which is the upper limit that can be won in the AT lottery, “the number of unreported games” is reported with an 80% probability, and “50 games” is reported with a 20% probability. The distribution rate is determined so as to be determined by the number of games.

  As a result, when the progress of the game is shifted to the preferential period, or during AT + normal, AT + RT2, it is determined to be "the number of games added this time" at a higher rate than when it is not, and earned The number of played AT games can be notified at one timing without being divided. In addition, even when the progress status of the game is shifted to the preferential period, or during AT + normal or AT + RT2, and when the number of added games is less than 40 this time, it is always set to “the number of added games this time”. The determined number of AT games can be notified at one timing without being divided.

  In addition, when the progress of the game is neither preferential period nor during AT + normal or AT + RT2, when the number of additional games is large this time, the number of additional games is small and it is relatively difficult to divide and divide. However, the distribution rate is set so that it is easy to be divided and notified by dividing at a high rate.

  In addition, when 250 games, which is the upper limit that can be won in the AT lottery, are determined, it is determined to be “the number of additional games this time” at a higher rate than when it is not so, without dividing the number of acquired AT games. Notification can be made at one timing. In particular, when the progress of the game is shifted to a preferential period, or when AT + normal or AT + RT2, it is determined that the upper limit of 250 games that can be won in the AT lottery is always “unreported game”. It can be notified at one timing without dividing the number of acquired AT games.

  FIG. 19C is a diagram for explaining the end time table. In the end-time table, a distribution rate for determining the number of additional games is determined according to the situation of the progress of the game.

  When the progress of the game is AT + normal or AT + RT2, the allocation rate is set so that “the number of unreported games” is always determined as the number of additional games to be notified with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, when neither AT + normal nor AT + RT2 is selected, any one of “5 games”, “10 games”, “15 games”, “20 games”, and “25 games” has a probability of 20%. The distribution ratio is determined so that the number of added games is determined.

  FIG. 19D is a diagram for explaining the specific time table. In the specific time table, a different allocation rate is determined depending on whether the opportunity to determine the number of additional games was out of place or a specific winning combination was won, and the number of unreported games when a specific winning combination was won Different distribution ratios are determined depending on whether or not is over a predetermined game.

  When the opportunity to determine the number of additional games is off, the “no notification” is 95% probability, “5 games” is 3% probability, “10 games” is 2% probability, and the number of additional games is The distribution rate is determined so as to be determined.

  In addition, when a specific winning combination is won when the number of games to be added is determined, and it is determined that the number of unreported AT games is less than “40 games”, “no notification” with a probability of 20%. However, the allocation is such that “the number of unreported games” is determined with a probability of 40%, “5 games” with a probability of 20%, and “10 games” with a probability of 20%. The rate is fixed.

  On the other hand, when a specific winning combination is won when the number of additional games is determined and it is determined that the number of unreported AT games is “40 games” or more, “no notification” with a probability of 5%. Is 10% probability of “number of unreported games” and 17% of probability is “5 games”, “10 games”, “15 games”, “20 games”, and “25 games” However, the allocation ratio is determined so that the number of added games is determined. As a result, when the number of unreported AT games is large, the number of unnotified AT games is small, and it is easier to divide and notify at a higher rate than when the situation is relatively difficult to divide and divide. The fraction is set.

  When the number of initial games and the number of added games determined by referring to the table shown in FIG. 19 are larger than the current number of unreported games, the “number of unreported games” is the number of initial games. Alternatively, the number of added games is determined.

  FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining an example of a change in the number of reported games and the number of unreported games in accordance with the progress of the game. FIG. 20 shows the winning situation of the AT lottery, the number of notification games specified from the notification game number information and notified on the liquid crystal display 51, and the number of unreported games specified from the information on the number of unreported games.

  As an example, timing 1 in FIG. 20 is the first AT hit in a non-AT, and “50 games” is determined as the number of AT games. Among the “50 games”, “20 games” is notified in S03 of FIG. A case where the number of games is determined is shown. That is, an example in which the number of acquired AT games is divided and notified at a plurality of timings is shown.

  When the AT first hit, as shown in S12 of FIG. 18, after an effect such as “AT winning! 20 games acquired!” Is executed as the game number notification effect, “20 games” is notified as the number of notification games. . The number of unreported games is 50-20 = 30 games. As described above, the initial number of games at the time of AT first hit is when the game won for the push-in rush replay that becomes the control trigger for RT3 is ended or is already in RT3 (including RT3 after AT end) ) Or the preferential period, it is notified when the game is over. As shown in S16 of FIG. 18, the number of notification games is displayed by subtracting one each time the game is digested.

  Timing 2 shows a case where a specific winning situation is reached and “20 games” is determined as the additional game number in S09 of FIG. 18 among the unreported game numbers “30 games”. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates the case where the number of notification games before the addition is “12 games”. The number of additional games when a specific winning situation is reached is notified when the game ends as described above.

  When the number of added games is determined, as shown in S12 of FIG. 18, after an effect such as “20 games added!” Is executed as the game number notification effect, 12 + 20 = “32 games” is notified as the number of notification games. ing. The number of unreported games is 30-20 = 10 games.

  Timing 3 is determined as the number of AT games to which “30 games” is added upon winning and the number of unreported games once becomes 10 + 30 = “40 games”, and the number of AT games to be added is “30 games”. Among these, the case where “20 games” is determined as the number of additional games in S05 of FIG. 18 by the extra winning is shown. FIG. 20 illustrates a case where the number of notification games before the addition is “4 games”.

  When the number of added games is determined, as shown in S12 of FIG. 18, after an effect such as “20 games added!” Is executed as the game number notification effect, 4 + 20 = “24 games” is notified as the number of notification games. ing. The number of unreported games is 40-20 = 20 games. As described above, the number of additional games at the time of winning the extra is as follows. When AT + normal or AT + RT2, etc., it is controlled again by RT3 and moved to ART (when the number of notification games has reached 0 before that) Timing), and when it is a period including other preferential periods, it is notified when the game is over.

  At timing 4, when the number of informed games becomes 1, that is, when “YES” is determined in S06 of FIG. 18, “10 games” out of “20 games” in S07 of FIG. A case where the number of added games is determined is shown.

  When the number of games to be added is determined when the number of notification games becomes 1, as described above, the number of notification games is decremented by 1 in S16 of FIG. Since an effect such as “Add 10 games!” Is executed as the number notification effect, “10 games” is notified. The number of unreported games is 20-10 = 10 games. The additional game number when the number of notification games is 1 is notified when the game is over as described above.

  Thus, by dividing and informing the acquired number of AT games by dividing into one time or a plurality of times, it is possible to increase the chances of adding the number of notification games indicating the number of games controlled by the AT. Further, the addition of the number of notification games can be executed according to the winning situation. For this reason, the winning situation after acquiring the number of AT games can effectively give an impression as if the number of AT games has been newly acquired, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[AT management processing]
The sub-control unit 91 performs the AT management process included in the effect state control process when in the normal gaming state, RT2, or RT3, and thereby based on the notification game number information updated in S13 and S16 of FIG. When the number of notification games is 1 or more, control is performed to the AT.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls to the AT when one or more pieces of notification game number information are set in the normal gaming state, RT2, or RT3. When controlled by AT in the normal gaming state or RT2, even if one game is consumed in the normal gaming state and RT2, it is possible to perform navigation effects by controlling to AT without subtracting 1 from the number of AT games. It becomes. In the normal gaming state during AT, when the RT2 is controlled by the promotion lip winning, the control to the AT is continued also in the RT2. When the RT2 is controlled to RT3 by the rush lip winning in the RT2 during the AT, the RT3 is controlled to the ART that is the AT. When the number of notification games reaches zero based on the notification game number information, AT ends. Note that once the control is performed by ART, even if AT + normal or AT + RT2 occurs again due to an operation error or the like, in that case, the number of notification games is decremented by 1 every time the game is consumed.

  While being controlled by the AT, a corresponding navigation effect is executed in the game won for the navigation target role corresponding to the gaming state. The navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state refers to push order promotion replays 1 to 6 including a promotion lip when in a normal gaming state, and push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 including a rushing lip or a falling lip when RT2. And push order rush replays 1 to 4, and push order melons 1 to 5 for RT 2 and RT 3. As a result, during the AT, it is possible to make the promotion lip winning intentionally, the fall lip winning avoidance, the rush lip winning, and the melon 1 winning (12 payouts).

[Game effect execution processing]
The sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, thereby controlling the navigation target according to the game state based on a command from the main control unit 41 when controlled by the AT. The navigation effect corresponding to the winning combination is executed.

  As a navigation effect when any one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won, a push order (see FIG. 9) for causing the RT 2 to control the promotion lip according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the push order promotion replay 1 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the push order promotion replay 2 is won, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when one of the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 is won, a push order for maintaining RT2 by avoiding a falling lip winning prize and winning a promotion lip according to the winning situation (FIG. 10). For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the push order maintenance replay 1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the push order maintenance replay 2, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order entry replays 1 to 4, a push order for allowing the RT 3 to control the RT entry by avoiding the falling lip prize according to the winning situation (see FIG. 11) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the push forward entry replay 1. Further, as a navigation effect when winning in the push order entry replay 2, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order melons 1 to 5 in RT2 or RT3, according to the winning situation, the “melon” of the middle reel 2C is stopped in the middle and 12 medals are paid out. The order of pushing (that is, the pushing order for winning melon 1 when the chance is reached, see FIG. 12) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the push order melon 1 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the push order melon 2 is won, a message such as “order push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified in the same manner regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate with an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient as long as a player can distinguish according to a winning condition. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs a game state effect execution process to display a game state effect related to the current game state or effect state, such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55, etc. Perform using the electrical parts.

  As the gaming state effect, for example, when it is non-AT (including the incubation period) regardless of the gaming state, a normal effect (for example, a message such as “normally” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) is performed. . In addition, a special effect (for example, a message such as “AT in progress” or a character being an ART image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) is performed during the AT regardless of the gaming state. Further, when controlled by the AT and during the AT, the above-described game number notification effect and the notification game number display are performed as the gaming state effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a bonus is provided for a predetermined period (for example, 5 games) on the condition that a strawberry or grape that can be simultaneously won with any of BB2, BB3, and RB has a relatively high probability. There will be a performance to recognize that you are selected. That is, as the gaming state effect, a continuous effect is provided for notifying information regarding whether or not the bonus is won over a predetermined period on condition that a strawberry or grape is won. This continuous effect is an effect in which, after performing an effect of developing a series of stories over a predetermined period, a bonus winning notification is made to notify the presence / absence and type of bonus winning as the ending of the story. Thereby, it can be said that the bonus may be won over a predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the effect control process executed by the sub-control unit 91, when a freeze command is received, a process for executing an effect during freezing (included in the game number notification effect) is performed for a predetermined period. The effect during freezing is performed by displaying the corresponding image on the liquid crystal display 51 during the freeze period and controlling the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 with the corresponding pattern.

  The freeze controlled on the main control unit 41 side may have a different form (for example, a different delay period) according to the type of execution condition that triggered the freeze. In this case, the main control unit 41 may transmit a freeze command that can specify the type of execution condition. Further, the effect during the freeze controlled on the sub-control unit 91 side may have a different form (for example, the effect period and the effect content differ) according to the type of execution condition specified from the freeze command.

  Next, the AT lottery (additional lottery) is performed during the period from the end of the ART due to an operation mistake during ART or the fall lip winning and the normal control of AT + to the start of ART again. A specific example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in the AT + RT2 game after the first AT hit, the push forward rush replay is won, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped so that the rush lip winning is made according to the navigation effect, as shown in FIG. 21 (a). Suppose that the combination of “banana-banana-white 7” is aligned on the winning line L1 and the rushing lip wins.

  When the entry lip is won, the process shifts from RT2 to RT3 and the control to the ART is started. At this time, the number of AT games is notified, and notification that the control to the AT according to the number of AT games is started is also performed. In FIG. 21A, a letter 201 “AT start” is displayed from the liquid crystal display 51 as a notification that the control to the AT according to the number of AT games has been started. In addition, as the AT game number notification, the number of games determined as the initial game number in the AT game number notification process at the time of the first AT hit is displayed. In FIG. 21A, as an example in which 50 is determined as the number of initial games, a character 200 of “remaining 50 games” is displayed. Although not shown, the notification that the control to the AT according to the number of AT games has been started ends when the ART game starts (that is, the next game in FIG. In the ART game, a character 204 (FIG. 4D), which is an image during ART, is displayed. Then, the number of AT games is subtracted from the next game of the game shown in FIG.

  In addition, if the rush rush replay is won, but if the rush lip is not won due to an operation mistake or the like, the ART is not started because it is not controlled by RT3, but in this case the number of AT games is not started even if the ART is not started. Is preferably started. That is, when the game won in the push forward entry replay in AT + RT2 is completed, the same notification and AT game number notification are performed as in FIG. Thus, it is possible to prevent an unintended game progression from starting the subtraction of the number of AT games indefinitely by not intentionally making the entry lip award.

  Note that, as described above, when the game is already in RT3 (including RT3 after the end of AT) or during the preferential period, the AT game number notification is started after the game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, for example, when 42 games are played at ART and the character 200 indicating that the remaining 8 games are displayed, the reel 2C is stopped for the first time, and the reel 2L is set for the second time. It is assumed that a navigation image 202 such as “middle left press” (“2-1-3” in FIG. 21) prompting the stop and the reel 2R to be the third stop is displayed. Then, it is assumed that the player erroneously operates the stop switch and stops the reel 2L first.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, it is assumed that, as a result of the above, when the player stops all the reels, for example, the melons on the reel 2C stop at the upper stage and the combinations of the transition outcomes for winning the melon are complete. As a result, the game state is shifted from RT3 to the normal game state, ART is terminated, and AT + normal control is performed. The liquid crystal display 51 displays a “Miss” character 203 for notifying that the stop switch is operated in the wrong order.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (d), although ART has ended, the number of AT games remains, so the characters 200 of “remaining 7 games” are displayed from the liquid crystal display 51, and are also images during ART. By continuing to display the character 204, the display of the image during ART is continued. In this way, by continuing to display the image during ART, it becomes possible to prevent the player from stopping the game when the ART is finished, and the operating rate of the slot machine is reduced. Can be prevented.

  After that, as long as the number of AT games exists, the AT is maintained and the navigation effect is executed. Therefore, by operating according to the operation procedure according to the navigation effect, the normal gaming state is shifted to RT2, and the RT2 is shifted to RT3. As a result, the ART is controlled again.

  Further, during AT + normal and AT + RT2, AT lottery and preferential period shift lottery are performed in the same manner as during ART. For this reason, the number of AT games may be added. Regarding the number of unannounced games added from ART to AT + normal control until it is controlled to ART again, when it is controlled again by RT3 and shifted to ART (the number of notification games has reached 0 before that) At times). When added during the preferential period, the number of games determined to be notified is notified at the end of the game.

  Note that there may be an unreported game number from the beginning even if it is not increased from ART to AT + normal control and again to ART control. In this case, notification is made when a game with the number of notification games of 1 (a game with the number of AT games notified at the time of completion of 0) or a game with a specific winning situation ends.

  FIG. 21E illustrates the case where there are 30 unreported game numbers when the number of notified AT games becomes zero. As shown in FIG. 21 (e), “+30 game” characters 205 are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a game number notification effect. Although not shown in FIG. 21 (e), in the game number notification effect, the number of notification games is increased by displaying a character and displaying a predetermined message before the character 205 is displayed. An effect is sung. Depending on the content of the message in this case, as described above, it is possible to vary the sense of expectation that actual freezing will occur thereafter and that the number of AT games will be reported. As shown in FIG. 21F, as a result of adding 30 games, a character 200 indicating that the number of remaining AT games is 30 is displayed.

  FIG. 22 (g) shows the order of pressing in the game after the transition from the normal gaming state to RT2 and in which the AT has the remaining 24 games (in the figure, the characters “24 remaining games” are displayed). A case is shown in which a rush replay (here, a push forward rush replay 3 in which a rush lip prize is obtained by pressing the middle left or middle right) is won. In this case, as shown in FIG. 22 (g), “middle left push” that prompts the reel 2C to be the first stop, the reel 2L to be the second stop, and the reel 2R to be the third stop (in FIG. 1-3 ") The navigation image 206 is displayed. The navigation image 206 has a display form different from that of the navigation image 202 and is shaded on the navigation image 202. In this embodiment, in a mode without shading, it is notified that a bell having a different advantage in the pushing order is won, and in a mode with shading, a replay having a different advantage in the pushing order is notified. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (h), the player operates the stop switch 8C so that the reel 2C is in the first stop according to the navigation image 206, and then, as shown in FIG. 22 (i), the reel 2L Suppose that the stop switch 8L is operated so as to be in the second stop, and finally, as shown in FIG. 22 (j), the stop switch 8R is operated so that the reel 2R is in the third stop. As a result, it is assumed that the combination of “banana-banana-white 7” is aligned on the winning line, and for example, a rush lip is won. When the entry lip is won, the process shifts from RT2 to RT3, and ART is restarted again. When ART is started, it returns to Fig.21 (a) and a game is performed in the same flow.

  In the next game after the games shown in FIGS. 22 (h) to 22 (j), notification that the control to the AT according to the number of AT games is started is not performed as shown in FIG. 21 (a). The character 201 “AT start” is not displayed from the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of repeatedly notifying that the control to the AT according to the number of AT games has been started, and to make the game progress smoothly.

  As described above, since the AT addition lottery is performed if the AT is in progress even if the AT is not in progress, there is a possibility that the number of AT games will be increased if the number of AT games remains at the end of the ART. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that ART will be resumed even after ART is terminated (that is, the transition to RT3 again during AT), and ART will resume after ART is terminated. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the period up to. In addition, even if the player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch and the ART ends, there is a possibility that the number of AT games will be increased if the AT remains, so the player will make a mistake in operating the stop switch. Even if it does, it can prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  Next, specific examples of a freeze effect, a freeze effect, and a game number notification effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 (k) shows the time when the game in which it is notified that the number of AT games is the remaining 8 is over. 23 (l) to (o), a freeze effect is executed at the start of the next game after the game ended in FIG. 23 (k), and the upper limit of 250 games is acquired as the number of AT games due to the occurrence of the freeze. An example of the game number notification effect when the number of games to be notified is determined to be 250 games will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 16D, when 250 games, which is the upper limit of the number of AT games that can be won by AT lottery, is determined, freezing occurs as a result at a high rate. .

  When the freeze occurs, a freeze effect is executed on the reels 2L to 2R. As the freeze effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (l), rotation control is performed in a specific mode (for example, the rotation speed is slower than normal, shown by a wavy line in FIG. 23 (l)), After performing stop control to stop a specific symbol combination (for example, a set of three stars 7) as shown in FIG. 23 (m), rotation control is performed again as shown in FIG. 23 (n). Control for shifting to normal rotation is performed. When the freeze effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), the player has a sense of expectation that a larger number of AT games are given and that the maximum number of AT games is given. Can be held in.

  In addition, as a game notification effect at the start of freeze, first, as shown in FIG. 23 (l), in response to the rotation control of the reels 2L to 2R, a display in which the character issues a message “I did it” is performed. . As described above, when the freeze occurs thereafter, the first mode is determined at a high rate as the mode of the game notification effect.

  Further, as an effect during freezing during freezing, as shown in FIG. 23 (m), after the character gives a message such as “I did it!” In response to the stop control of the reels 2L to 2R, As shown in FIG. 23 (n), in response to the re-rotation control of the reels 2L to 2R, the character displays a message such as “Large!”.

  Also, when the game for which the display result is derived in the game in which the freeze has occurred and the game number notification effect has been executed is ended, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Here, as described above, since it is determined to acquire and notify the upper limit of 250 games, the character 205 of “+250 games” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the process proceeds to the next game.

  23 (p) and (q), the case where no freeze occurs but the number of AT games is notified will be described. Here, an example of the game number notification effect when 100 games are acquired as the number of AT games and 30 games are determined as the number of games to be notified will be described. As the game notification effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (p), when the character is displayed to give a message such as “Chance may”, when the game ends, the notification is shown as shown in FIG. 23 (q). Then, “+30 game” corresponding to the determined number of AT games is also displayed with the character 205, and the next game is started.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the number of AT games awarded by winning an AT is notified (all notified) in one game, or multiple times over a plurality of games. Divided into notifications. When the maximum number of AT games that can be won in the AT lottery is determined to be 250, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the progress of the game is a specific progress such as a preferential period. In some cases, notification is always made in one game, and notification is made in one game at a high rate even when it is not in a specific progress state. For this reason, when the number of AT games is notified in a plurality of times, it is possible to give an impression that the number of AT games is given multiple times and the number of AT games is given multiple times, and the maximum number of AT games is given. At times, it is possible to ensure that the player has a sense of superiority due to the maximum number of AT games being given, and to improve the fun of the game, by preventing the notification of being divided into multiple times as much as possible. .

  (1-2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16D, when the fifth AT lottery condition established by the occurrence of the freeze is established, the other AT lottery conditions are established. It is set to be determined to be 250 games, which is the upper limit of the number of AT games that can be won by AT lottery at a higher rate than the time. For this reason, when the upper limit of 250 games is determined, freezing occurs at a higher rate than when the upper limit is determined to be less than 250 games. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation that freezing will occur and the freezing effect will be executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (1-3) In the embodiment described above, the number of AT games granted during the preferential period in which the expectation for the AT winning and the number of AT games being given is improved is shown in FIG. And as shown in (b), when the number of assigned AT games is less than 40, it is always notified in one game, and even when it is 40 or more, it is notified in one game at a high rate. For this reason, when the number of AT games is notified in a plurality of times, it is possible to give an impression that the number of AT games is awarded a plurality of times by winning the AT a plurality of times, and the number of AT games is divided into a plurality of times in the preferential period. By preventing as much as possible from being notified, the player can experience the advantage in the preferential period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in S15 and S16 of FIG. 18, the number of notification games is notified (displayed) in the notification game number information set in response to the notification of the number of AT games awarded by winning the AT. After that, it is updated so that it decreases according to the progress of the game at ART, and during a special period such as during AT + normal or AT + RT 2 after the interruption condition for interrupting ART is established by stopping the falling roll Will also be updated. On the other hand, during the special period, as shown in FIG. 14, the AT lottery can be performed and the number of AT games can be increased as in the ART. That is, as compared to the case where the number of notification games is simply subtracted during the special period, the advantage for the player can be compensated for by performing the AT lottery in the same manner as during ART. As a result, the interest of the game during the special period can be improved.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the number of AT games given during the preferential period is the minimum of 10 games out of the number of AT games that can be given at a high rate. However, since it is notified in one game as shown in FIG. 19, the interest of the game in the preferential period is reduced by notifying the minimum 10 games divided into a plurality of times. Can be prevented.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, since the number of AT games is given in each game during the preferential period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the preferential period.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), the number of AT games assigned when the AT is ended, that is, during non-AT + RT3, is high in one game. Informed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the attenuation of the pleasure of being controlled again by ART.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15B, the expected value of the number of AT games is increased in the final game during the preferential period. For this reason, the possibility that the player can be satisfied in the final game during the preferential period increases, and the interest of the game during the preferential period can be improved.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), the AT game number that is awarded through AT lottery during AT + normal or AT + RT2 dropped from ART is high. Since it is notified in one game, the player is given an impression that a larger number of AT games are added during AT + normal or AT + RT2 than in the case of being notified in multiple times. Can do. In addition, the number of AT games added during AT + normal or AT + RT2 that has fallen from ART is the number of notification games when the number of notification games reaches zero or when the number of notification games shifts to ART again until the number of notification games reaches zero. It is notified on the condition that it shifted to. For this reason, during AT + normal or AT + RT2, an increased advantageous amount is added to the possibility that the number of notification games may be increased until the number of notification games becomes zero or the transition to ART again. Sustained expectations for potential. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during AT + normal or AT + RT2.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, among “50 games” that are the number of AT games acquired at timing 1, “20 games” are divided and notified. As shown in timing 2, the remaining number of unreported games “30 games” is divided and notified according to the winning situation in a game that is newly started thereafter. Therefore, depending on the winning situation of the game that is started after actually acquiring the number of AT games, it is effective to feel as if the number of AT games has been newly added, even though it has not actually been won. And can enhance the fun of the game.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, among the games that are newly started after acquiring the number of AT games, as shown in timing 3 of FIG. In the game that triggered this, instead of notifying the number of unannounced games out of the number of AT games acquired at timing 1, the number of newly acquired additional games is divided into one or more times and divided. To inform. In other words, since the number of AT games acquired previously can be further notified at other occasions after the newly added game, the number of unreported games among the number of AT games acquired previously is calculated. It is possible to postpone the notification opportunity, and postpone the opportunity to give an impression as if the number of AT games has been newly added, thereby extending the period of expectation.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, when the number of AT games is acquired and the number of AT games is actually added after winning the number of AT games, refer to the addition table in FIG. Then, the number of added games newly acquired this time is divided into one or a plurality of times and divided and notified. Further, in the addition table in FIG. 19B, the number of added games this time is divided at a higher rate when the number of added games is “40 games” or more than when the number of added games is less than “40 games”. Are divided and notified. For this reason, in spite of the fact that the number of games added this time is small, the inconvenience that the small number of games is further divided and notified and the player's expectation is adversely affected. Can be reduced.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, when an opportunity that can be won by establishing an AT lottery condition is established (for example, an internal winning is one of grape, strawberry, BAR templey replays 1 to 4 and BAR replay) The number of additional games determined in S05 of FIG. 18 by winning the extra game, or the number of additional games determined in S09 can be notified even when the additional game is not actually won. For this reason, it is possible to increase the frequency with which an impression can be given as if the number of AT games was newly added when winning one of grapes, strawberries, BAR temper replays 1 to 4 and BAR replays. A sense of expectation for winning one of grapes, strawberries, BAR templey replays 1 to 4 and BAR replays can be improved.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, after the number of AT games is awarded, when the AT lottery condition is not satisfied and the “exit” that is not an opportunity to be added becomes S09 in FIG. As indicated by, the number of unreported games can be reported. For this reason, it is possible to give an impression as if the number of AT games has been given even when it becomes “out of”, and it is possible to have an unexpectedness with respect to an increase in the number of unreported games. .

  Even in such a configuration, when it becomes “out of”, it is notified only with a lower probability than when it becomes an internal winning situation that triggers an AT lottery condition to be added and won. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent pseudo-addition notifications.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, when there is an unreported game number, the number of reported games is 1, and the number of reported games is 0 in the game, that is, the number of reported games is equal to AT. In the controlled state, the number of notification games can be added again within the range of the number of unreported games, as indicated by S06 and S07 in FIG. For this reason, even after the AT is controlled by the number of notification games, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the number of notification games will be increased, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, for example, when the number of unreported games is less than “40 games” as shown in the initial hit table of FIG. 19A referred to in S03 of FIG. Instead, the number of unreported games is divided and notified at a higher rate when the number of games is “40 games” or more. The same applies when the winning status table in FIG. 19D is referenced. For this reason, in spite of the fact that the number of unreported AT games is a small number, the small number of games is further divided and divided, so that the player's expectation is adversely affected. Can be reduced.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modified examples applicable to the present invention will be described.

[Notification when acquiring maximum number of AT games]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, even when the maximum number of AT games is acquired, the progress of the game is not a specific progress such as a preferential period. The example which divided | segmented and alert | reported in several timings was demonstrated. However, when the maximum number of AT games is acquired, it may be notified at one timing (predetermined period). Specifically, regardless of whether or not the progress of the game is a specific progress, the number of notification games may be determined to be the number of unreported games or the number of additional games this time.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16D, when a freeze occurs, the number of AT games that can be expected to be acquired is set to be large. For this reason, the expectation with respect to the magnitude | size of the number of AT games acquired when the freeze generate | occur | produces has improved. Therefore, if a small number of games are notified as the number of AT games when a freeze occurs, the player's expectation may be reduced. In order to avoid such an inconvenience, the number of AT games acquired at the time of freeze occurrence must be notified at one timing (predetermined period) without fail (or at a higher rate than when no freeze occurs). Also good. As a result, it is possible to avoid as much as possible that the sense of expectation that has been improved is reduced as compared with the case where the number of AT games acquired when the freeze occurs is divided and notified.

[Notice during the preferential period]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which even if the number of AT games acquired during the preferential period is divided into a plurality of timings when the number of AT games is 40 or more. However, the number of AT games acquired in the preferential period may be always notified at one timing (predetermined period). Specifically, regardless of the number of acquired AT games, the number of notification games may be determined to be the number of unreported games or the number of additional games this time. Further, not only the preferential period, but also the number of AT games acquired during RT3 after the end of AT shown in FIG. 19A, or during AT + normal time or AT + RT2 shown in FIG. You may make it alert | report in (predetermined period).

[Notification within a predetermined period or at one timing]
In the above-described embodiment, the number of AT games determined to be executed and notified within a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game is notified, and in that case An example has been described in which the number of AT games is not limited to being notified once, but may be notified in multiple times. In the case where notification is made in a plurality of times within a predetermined period or at one timing, the number of AT games divided within the predetermined period is individually notified, and the player himself adds the notified number of AT games. It may be possible to specify the number of AT games played, and finally by adding the number of AT games to be notified for the second time or later to the number of AT games to be notified for the first time within the predetermined period. It may be possible to specify the number of AT games acquired from the number of games notified to the user.

[About multiple game periods or multiple timings]
In the above-described embodiment, when the acquired number of AT games is divided and notified in a plurality of times, the number of divided AT games is not notified unless it is determined as YES in S06 and S08 of FIG. As a result, a period in which the number of acquired AT games is notified, that is, a plurality of game periods, timing, and the number of notifications, is a period that changes each time. However, the plurality of game periods or the plurality of timings are not limited to the period changing in this way, but a predetermined period (for example, a period required until the predetermined number of games are consumed), a predetermined timing, and a predetermined notification It may be the number of times.

[Displaying and subtracting the number of AT games]
In the above-described embodiment, display and subtraction of the number of AT games starts from the next game of the game regardless of whether or not the entry lip is won and whether or not the entry lip is won (whether or not controlled by RT3). The example to do was demonstrated. However, the display of the number of AT games starts at a predetermined timing regardless of whether or not the entry lip is won, and the subtraction of the number of AT games starts from the game next to the game that entered the entry lip winning (controlled to RT3). It may be. In this case, as shown in the fourth AT lottery condition of FIG. 14, after winning the AT, the normal game state where the AT game number is not intentionally subtracted is maintained, and the fourth AT lottery condition is established during that time. There is a risk that a game progress that is different from the originally set game progress, such as increasing the number of AT games, may occur. However, as described above, the fourth AT lottery condition does not hold even if the normal replay is won until the AT is won and the number of AT games is notified. Since it is established by winning the normal replay after the notification is made, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience from occurring.

[Number of notification games]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D, an example in which the minimum number of notification games is set to 5 has been described. However, the minimum number of notification games is not limited to this, and may be the same as the minimum number of AT games that can be acquired, for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16. Specifically, in the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, the minimum number of notification games may be set to ten.

[Advantages of extra lottery]
In the above-described embodiment, the advantage of the extra lottery (AT winning probability, the number of AT games that can be expected at the time of AT winning, etc.) during AT + normal or AT + RT2 where the falling point stopped in ART and in ART An example in which the advantage of the extra lottery is the same has been described. However, the advantage of the extra lottery during AT + normal or AT + RT2 that has fallen due to the stop of the fallout in ART may be different from the advantage of the extra lottery during ART. For example, the advantage of the extra lottery during AT + normal or AT + RT2 that has fallen due to the stop of the fallout in ART may be higher than the advantage of the extra lottery during ART. It may be lower.

[AT latency]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the control to the ART is continued as long as the remaining number of AT games exists in the ART has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if there are remaining AT games in the ART, if the number of notification games becomes 0, the navigation effect is not executed in the same manner as when the ART is ended. You may make it control to the incubation period which makes AT incubate. For example, even when there is an unreported AT game number when the number of reported games becomes 0, the latent period is controlled with a predetermined probability, and the number of unreported AT games is again set after the latent period has elapsed. You may make it alert | report and control to AT.

[About advantageous condition and advantageous amount]
In the above-described embodiment, the AT in which the navigation effect is executed is exemplified as the advantageous state. However, the advantageous state is not limited to this as long as it is advantageous for the player, and the winning probability of the predetermined winning combination is improved. (Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Challenge Bonus, RT, etc.), a state in which the probability of being controlled to a specific state that is more advantageous for the player (probability fluctuation state), and achievement conditions are presented and given in a given period It may be in any state such as a state (mission) that suggests that the achievement condition is established to be controlled to a specific state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of AT games that can be controlled by the AT is exemplified as the advantageous amount. However, the advantageous amount is not limited to this as long as it specifies the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled. For example, when one is won, a value (for example, Navistock) that makes it possible to specify that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state over a predetermined number of games or a predetermined winning combination that is generated by operating in a specific operation procedure is won. Any number such as the number of times of notification of the operation procedure (for example, the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed) may be used.

[Production during delay control]
In the above-described embodiment, the reel is fluctuated (rotated) as an effect to be executed in the period during which the freeze is generated, that is, after the game is started, in the period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed. The example which performs reel effect control by this was demonstrated. Also, as reel effect control during freeze, for example, after changing (rotating) three reels in a different manner, the reels are arranged so that the same symbol combination (three stars 7) is aligned. The control which performs the production | generation which stops in synchronization was illustrated. However, the reel effect control during the freeze is not limited to this, and after rotating it, it is slowly moved by synchronously rotating so that the same symbol combination (three stars 7) are aligned on a straight line. There may be. Further, before and after performing such reel effect control, the following control may be further performed. In addition, since the configuration of the slot machine in the following example includes the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, different points are mainly described in the following example.

(I) Example 1
After the start of the game that generates freeze, the initial position detection control is performed before the reel effect control. The initial position detection control refers to relative rotation at the start of rotation of the three reels by synchronously rotating all three reels in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. It is control which specifies the initial positional relationship which is a typical positional relationship. In the initial position detection control, since the relative positional relationship between the reels can be specified at the reference position of all the reels, the reel effect control is based on the relative positional relationship between the reels specified here. Each reel is controlled. In the initial position detection control, not only the initial positional relationship, which is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, but also the number of steps until the reel reference position is detected, the three reels are counted. The initial position at the start of rotation is also specified.

  Further, in Example 1, in order to reliably detect the reference positions of all the reels, control is performed to rotate the three reels stopped by the initial position detection control in one synchronous rotation. If the reference position cannot be detected even with one reel, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the reel and error control is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control after the initial position detection control. In the reel effect control, the relative positional relationship between the reels is controlled so that the corresponding symbols (for example, white 7) are arranged in a straight line while maintaining the rotation of the reels.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs initial position return control after reel effect control. In the initial position return control, while maintaining the rotation of the reels, the relative positions of the reels are set so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship of the reels at the start of the reel rotation specified in the initial position detection control. The general positional relationship.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs initial position notification control after the initial position return control. In the initial position notification control, the reels are rotated at the stop positions where the reels were stopped at the start of the reel rotation after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of the reel rotation. Is temporarily stopped, the player is informed that it has returned to the initial position, and then the reel starts to rotate again while maintaining the initial positional relationship.

  Then, after the initial position notification control, the main CPU 41a accelerates the rotation speed of the reel, and validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the rotation speed is constant.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a changes the visibility of the reel by performing the lighting LED on / off control in accordance with the initial position detection control, the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control in the freeze period. To control. The turning on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the initial position detection control, the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control is based on the relative position of each reel at the start of reel rotation based on the reel effect command described above. The initial positional relationship, which is a relationship, is specified, the display position of each reel is specified from the specified initial positional relationship, and the process is performed according to the specified display position.

  According to such a configuration, after the game is started, the relative positional relationship between the three reels in the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed is a specific positional relationship (“ Since the reel effect control is performed so that the white 7 "is aligned in a straight line), an effect with an impact can be achieved in the reel variation mode during the freeze period.

  In Example 1, as the special variation control for performing variation control of the plurality of variable display regions so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display regions becomes a specific positional relationship, Reel effect control is applied in which reels are synchronized and rotated so that combinations of the same symbols are aligned in a straight line. For example, reel effect that is displayed while moving up and down with "white 7" lined up. Control, control to stop the state where "white 7" is aligned at a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3, and when the state where "white 7" is aligned passes through a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 without stopping You may apply the control which makes it rotate at a speed slower than the symbol of pass. The same applies to Examples 2 to 9 described below.

  Further, as described above, after performing reel effect control in which the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a specific positional relationship, for example, “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged, the reels are maintained in the positional relationship as they are. If the player's stop operation is enabled, if the player operates the top switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an appropriate and continuous manner, the timing at which the stop operation is first performed is accidentally within the “white 7” pull-in range. For example, the timing of the stop operation of the other reels is also likely to be the “white 7” pull-in range, and the reel positional control is not performed, that is, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is the specific positional relationship. If this is not the case, the possibility that “white 7-white 7-white 7” will be aligned is increased compared to the case where the player appropriately operates the top switches 8L, 8C, 8R continuously. It becomes. In this way, by performing the reel effect control, a certain regularity is created between the relative positional relationship between the reels and the reel stop operation, thereby changing the degree of technical intervention of the reel stop operation. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in Example 1, when the reel effect control is performed without holding the stop position of each reel in the previous game in the work area of the RAM 41c, the reel effect control is performed after the game is started. Before starting, the initial positional relationship, which is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, is specified by synchronously rotating all the reels in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. In addition to performing the initial position detection control and after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship of the three reels is changed to the initial positional relationship, that is, the reel rotation. When the reel effect control is performed so that “white 7” is aligned in a straight line so that the relative positional relationship at the start is restored. Even if such reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the reels are stopped by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The difficulty of operation does not change. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is returned to the same positional relationship as when the reels were stopped in the previous game, that is, the positional relationship with no regularity. Even if the reel production control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the slot machine that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control The gameplay will not be compromised.

  In Example 1, after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, not only the relative positional relationship of the three reels is returned to the initial positional relationship but also the initial positional relationship. After returning to the positional relationship, the control indicating that the initial positional relationship has been returned, that is, the reels are rotated after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of reel rotation. Each reel is temporarily stopped at the stop position where each reel was stopped at the start, and control is performed to notify the player that the reel has returned to the initial position. It is possible to notify the player that the symbol has returned to the initial positional relationship, rather than the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned on the reel production control, and the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned. There a misconception to stop switch 8L, 8C, that reel stop operation will be performed by 8R can be prevented.

  In Example 1, the reels are rotated at the stop positions where the reels were stopped at the start of the reel rotation after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of the reel rotation. Is temporarily informed to the player that the player has returned to the initial position, but it may be configured to notify the player that at least the operator has returned to the initial position. A configuration that informs the player that the position has returned to the initial position by synchronously rotating more than one rotation more slowly than usual while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of reel rotation. The corresponding stop when the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the start of reel rotation passes after synchronous rotation with the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of rotation. By irradiating the areas corresponding to match the passage of location in the reel LED 55, even such configuration that notifies the player to the effect that has returned to the initial position, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

  Further, in Example 1, when the reel effect control is performed, after the game starts, first, the three reels that are stopped are synchronously rotated in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. By performing initial position detection control for specifying an initial positional relationship that is a relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, the initial relationship before the positional relationship between the reels is changed by the reel effect control. The positional relationship is specified, and after the reel effect control is finished, the positional relationship at the start of the reel rotation can be surely restored before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  Thus, for example, when the reels step out in the previous game, or when the position of the reels is manually moved on the game site side, the position of each reel specified by the main CPU 41a when the reels were stopped in the previous game. Even if the actual position of each reel is different, after the reel effect control is finished, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, the positional relationship at the start of reel rotation is restored. It becomes possible.

  In Example 1, since the initial position detection control is performed and the initial position relationship is specified when the reel effect control is performed, the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are held. Therefore, it is possible to save a necessary area as a work area of the RAM 41c.

  In Example 1, the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are not held, but the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are held. With such a configuration, for example, the positional relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game is compared with the initial positional relationship specified by the initial position detection control, and these are compared. If they do not match, it is possible to detect that the reel is out of step. Then, as a result of comparing the positional relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the initial positional relationship specified by the initial position detection control, when an inconsistency is determined, control is performed to an error state. Thus, it is possible to easily specify that a problem such as step-out has occurred. In addition, when the positional relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game is compared with the initial positional relationship specified by the initial position detection control, if an inconsistency is determined, the error state is always controlled. For example, it may be possible to control to an error state only when a mismatch is continuously determined or when a mismatch is determined at a certain rate or more. Even if the key is tuned up, it does not occur frequently, but it is controlled to an error state, and the game can be prevented from being interrupted.

  As described above, the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are maintained, and the position relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the initial position detection control are used. When the initial position relationship is compared, at least the initial position detection control identifies the initial position relationship, and the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position at that time until the initial position relationship is compared. Any configuration may be used as long as the relationship is maintained, and thereafter, the configuration may not be maintained, or the configuration may be maintained until the game ends. Further, when it is determined that the initial position detection control (reel effect control) is not performed, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game and its positional relationship may not be maintained after that time. Further, in the configuration for determining whether or not the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed in the previous game as in Example 1, the game is performed only when it is determined that the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed in the next game. The stop position of each reel at the time of completion and the positional relationship may be held at least until the initial position detection control identifies the initial positional relationship and compares it with the initial positional relationship.

  In addition, while performing the reel effect control during the freeze period, the effect of changing the visibility of the reel by performing the lighting / extinguishing control of the reel LED 55 is performed, and the effect of changing the reel due to the reel effect control is achieved. In addition, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the initial position relationship has been returned in the initial position notification control after the reel effect control.

  In addition, the effect of changing the visibility of the reel by turning on / off the reel LED 55 is performed only in the freeze period, that is, the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, and the stop switch 8L, After the reel stop operation by 8C and 8R becomes effective, until all the reels stop, the reel LEDs 55 corresponding to all the regions are kept lit, and the visibility of the reels does not change. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the visibility of the reel without changing the difficulty level of the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

(Ii) Example 2
In Example 1, before performing the reel effect control, the three reels of the three reels are synchronously rotated in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. In contrast to the initial position detection control that specifies the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation, in Example 2, the initial position detection control is not performed, and each reel at the end of the previous game is not performed. The stop position is held until the end of the next game, and the initial positional relationship is specified from the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game.

  In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 24, the main CPU 41a starts reel effect control immediately after the start of the game when controlling the freeze state.

  Next, after the reel effect control, the main CPU 41a performs initial position return control as shown in FIG. In the initial position return control, the relative positional relationship between the reels is controlled so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game while maintaining the rotation of the reels. To do. In Example 2, as described above, the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game is held until the end of the next game. From the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game, The initial positional relationship can be specified.

  Next, after the initial position return control, the main CPU 41a performs initial position notification control as shown in FIG. In the initial position notification control, after the synchronous rotation with the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game, the stop that was stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game Each reel is temporarily stopped at the position, the player is notified that the reel has returned to the initial position, and then the reel starts to rotate again while maintaining the initial positional relationship.

  Then, after the initial position notification control, the main CPU 41a accelerates the reel rotation speed and, as shown in FIG. 24, activates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the rotation speed is constant. .

  Further, in Example 2, the sub CPU 91a performs control to change the visibility of the reel by performing turning on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control in the freeze period. To do. The reel LED 55 on / off control in accordance with the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control is performed by specifying the display position of each reel when the reel is stopped from the reel stop command described above. It is performed according to the position.

  During the reel production control, the reel LED 55 is turned off sequentially from the area corresponding to the upper design in accordance with the rotation of the reel, and the symbols that can be aligned by the reel production control, that is, “white 7” is passed. Then, the reel LED 55 in the area through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other areas are turned off, and the symbols corresponding to the control pattern are arranged in a straight line, and then arranged in the straight line. In accordance with the passage of the symbol, control is performed so that the reel LED 55 in the region through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other regions are turned off. For example, if “white 7” is aligned on a straight line, the area through which the “white 7” passes is turned on in accordance with the passage of the “white 7”, and the other areas are turned off. The visibility of the reels is changed so as to emphasize the aligned symbols.

  Next, during the initial position return control, after the reel LEDs 55 in all the areas are once turned off, when the relative positional relationship between the reels returns to the initial positional relationship, each reel is set at the end of the previous game. Control is performed so that the reel LED 55 is turned on in accordance with the passage of three consecutive symbols serving as the stopped positions, and the other areas are turned off.

  Next, in the initial position notification control, the reel LEDs 55 in all the areas are blinked when the stop position stopped on each reel at the end of the previous game is temporarily stopped, and stopped on each reel at the end of the previous game. Emphasize that you have returned to the stop position you were using. Next, when the rotation of the reels starts again, the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are turned on, and then the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, and all the reels stop with the stop operation. Up to this point, the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55 in all regions is maintained.

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 2, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game is held until the end of the next game, and when the reel effect control is performed, the stop is performed after the reel effect control. Before the operation of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is determined from the initial positional relationship, that is, from the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game. Even when the reel effect control is performed so that “white 7” is aligned on a straight line, such a reel effect control is not performed. Even after that, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, it is difficult to stop the reels by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Degree will not be changed. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is returned to the same positional relationship as when the reels were stopped in the previous game, that is, the positional relationship with no regularity. Even if the reel production control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the slot machine that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control The gameplay will not be compromised.

  In Example 2, after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, not only the relative positional relationship of the three reels is returned to the initial positional relationship but also the initial positional relationship. After returning to the positional relationship, the control suggesting that the initial positional relationship has been returned, that is, the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game, the synchronous rotation, and the previous game Each reel is temporarily stopped at the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the end, and control is performed to notify the player that the reel has returned to the initial position. It is possible to notify the player that the symbol has returned to the initial positional relationship, rather than the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned on the reel production control, and the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned. There a misconception to stop switch 8L, 8C, that reel stop operation will be performed by 8R can be prevented.

  In Example 2, each reel is stopped at the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative position relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game. Is temporarily informed to the player that the player has returned to the initial position, but it may be configured to notify the player that at least the operator has returned to the initial position. A configuration in which the player is informed of the return to the initial position by performing synchronous rotation more slowly than usual while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game. After the synchronous rotation with the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game, when the stop position stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game passes, the corresponding stop By irradiating the areas corresponding to match the passage of location in the reel LED 55, even such configuration that notifies the player to the effect that has returned to the initial position, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

  Further, in Example 2, by holding the stop position of each reel at the end of the game until the end of the next game, it becomes possible to specify the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game. From the reel stop position, the initial positional relationship before the positional relationship between the reels is changed by the reel effect control is specified. After the game starts, the positional relationship between the reels at that time is detected. The reel effect control can be started immediately without performing the control, that is, without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  In Example 2, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game is held until the end of the next game. However, at least after the end of the reel effect control, it is held until the initial position return control is performed. What is necessary is just to have a structure which is not hold | maintained after that. Further, when it is determined that the reel effect control is not performed, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game may not be held after that time. Further, in the configuration for determining whether or not the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed in the previous game as in Example 2, only when it is determined that the reel effect control is performed in the next game, Any configuration may be used as long as the reel stop position is held at least after the end of the reel effect control until the initial position return control is performed.

(Iii) Example 3
In Example 1, the main CPU 41a is configured to perform the initial position return control after the reel effect control, whereas in Example 3, not the initial position return control but the relative effect of each reel after the reel effect control. The positional relationship change control is performed to change these positional relationships so that the general positional relationship becomes random. Therefore, in Example 3, it is not necessary to specify the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, and the initial position detection control is performed before the reel effect control is performed as in Example 1. This is not performed, and the stop position of each reel is not held until the end of the next game as in Example 2.

  In Example 3, as shown in FIG. 25, the main CPU 41a starts reel effect control immediately after starting the game when controlling to the freeze state. In addition, when the freeze lottery is won, at the same time, that is, before the reel production control is started, the position changed by the positional relationship change control after the reel production control is ended is random. A positional relationship determination process for determining the relationship is performed.

  In the positional relationship determination process, a change amount determination lottery is performed in which the change amount for the current position is randomly determined in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols for each reel.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the change amount determination lottery, a lottery is performed using random numbers having different total update ranges for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Specifically, random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 996 are used in the lottery for determining the change amount of the left reel, and random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 997 are used in the lottery for determining the change amount of the middle reel. In the lottery used to determine the amount of change of the right reel, a random number updated in the range of 0 to 998 is used.

  Both of these random numbers are soft random numbers that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. However, since the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, random numbers are used. The update cycle between each other is difficult to synchronize.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, in the change amount determination lottery, 0 to 4 symbols are won in almost equal proportions as the change amount in any reel. Since the cycle is not synchronized, it is difficult to determine the same change amount as the change amount of each reel.

  Further, the least common multiple that 997, 998, and 999, which are the total number of random numbers, is synchronized is 994010994. In Example 3, each random number is updated for each timer interrupt process (main), and the interval between them is updated. Is 0.56 ms and is updated about 1786 times per second, so the next three random numbers will be synchronized after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually 13 Since it is about time, the same random number combination is not extracted during the day and the change amount determination lottery is not performed, but each time the reel effect control is performed, the same change amount combination as the combination of change amounts of each reel Is difficult to determine.

  Then, the main CPU 41a determines the relative positional relationship between these three reels by performing each change amount determination lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control, and thereafter performs positional relationship change control for changing the relative positional relationship of each reel based on the result of the change amount determination lottery, as shown in FIG. In the positional relationship change control, the rotation speed of the left reel is maintained until the positional relationship between the left reel and other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the left reel change amount determination lottery while maintaining the rotation of the reel. Is controlled slower than the other reels, and then returned to the same speed as the other reels. Next, after controlling the rotation speed of the middle reel slower than the other reels until the positional relationship between the middle reel and the other reels is deviated by the number of symbols won in the middle reel change amount determination lottery, Return to the same speed as the rotation speed. Finally, until the positional relationship between the right reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the right reel change amount determination lottery, control the rotation speed of the right reel slower than other reels, Return to the same speed as the reel. Thereby, the positional relationship between the reels becomes a random positional relationship.

  Then, the main CPU 41a makes the positional relationship between the reels a random positional relationship by the positional relationship change control, then accelerates the rotational speed of all the reels, and when the constant rotational speed is reached as shown in FIG. Then, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  Further, in Example 3, the sub CPU 91a performs control to change the visibility of the reels by performing on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control and the positional relationship change control in the freeze period. The turn-on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control and the positional relationship change control is performed according to the specified display position by specifying the display position of each reel when the reel is stopped from the reel stop command described above. It is supposed to be.

  During the reel effect control, the reel LED 55 is sequentially turned off from the area corresponding to the upper symbol in accordance with the rotation of the reel, and the symbols that can be aligned by the reel effect control, for example, “white 7” are passed. Then, the reel LED 55 in the area through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other areas are turned off, and the symbols corresponding to the control pattern are arranged in a straight line, and then arranged in the straight line. In accordance with the passage of the symbol, control is performed so that the reel LED 55 in the region through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other regions are turned off. For example, if “white 7” is aligned on a straight line, the area through which the “white 7” passes is turned on in accordance with the passage of the “white 7”, and the other areas are turned off. The visibility of the reels is changed so as to emphasize the aligned symbols.

  Next, during the positional relationship change control, the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are once turned off, and then the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are turned on when the relative positional relationship of each reel becomes a random positional relationship. After that, until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated and all the reels are stopped by the stop operation, the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions is maintained. .

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 3, when the reel effect control is performed, the positional relationship is determined so that the relative positional relationship between the reels is random, and after the reel effect control, the stop is stopped. Before the operations of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed to a random positional relationship determined before the reel effect control. Even when the reel effect control is performed so that “white 7” is aligned on a straight line, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are thereafter compared with the case where such reel effect control is not performed. After the operation becomes effective, the difficulty of the reel stop operation by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R does not become extremely low. In other words, even when reel production control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed to a random positional relationship, that is, a positional relationship having no regularity. If the control is not performed, there will be no regularity that does not occur, and the game performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control is impaired. There is no end.

  In Example 3, the reel effect control is performed by changing the relative positional relationship between the reels to a random positional relationship after the reel effect control, regardless of the positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game. Since the game machine of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player is not impaired by performing the game, the positional relationship between the reels at that time is detected after the game is started. The reel effect control can be started immediately without performing the control, that is, without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  Further, in Example 3, the positional relationship determination process for determining the positional relationship so that the positional relationship changed by the positional relationship change control after the end of the reel rendering control is random at the stage before starting the reel rendering control. It is possible to perform freeze lottery, that is, processing for determining whether or not to perform reel effect control and position relationship determination processing can be performed continuously without interposing reel effect control. Can be simplified, and after the reel effect control is finished, it is possible to immediately shift to the positional relationship change control.

  In Example 3, the positional relationship determination process is performed at a stage before starting the reel effect control. However, as shown in FIG. 28, the positional relationship determination process is performed after the reel effect control, and the result is as follows. The configuration may be such that the positional relationship change control is performed based on this, and this configuration holds the data for specifying the relative positional relationship between the reels used in the positional relationship change control over the period of the reel effect control. For example, even when the power is interrupted during the reel effect control period, the amount of data to be held until the power is restored can be reduced.

  In addition, as in Example 3, in the positional relationship determination process, if the change amount determination lottery for determining the change amount for the current position is determined for each reel, the reel change amount determination for changing the relative positional relationship is performed. A configuration in which lottery is performed, and control for changing the positional relationship of the reels immediately (control for shifting the change amount selected in the change amount determination lottery) may be performed sequentially for each reel, and such a configuration is adopted. As a result, it is not necessary to maintain the amount of change for reels other than the reel whose position is changed by the positional relationship change control.

  Further, in Example 3, after the reel effect control, the rotational speed of one reel is set higher than that of the other reels until the positional relationship between the one reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the change amount determination lottery. In this configuration, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by controlling to return to the same speed as the rotation speed of the other reels. One change time is determined from the change time, and the rotation speed of one reel is changed to the other reel until the change time determined in the change amount determination lottery is determined by the positional relationship between one reel and the other reel. It is good also as a structure which changes the relative positional relationship of reels by control returned to the same speed as the rotational speed of another reel, after controlling slower than it.

  In addition, after the reel production control, the acceleration of one reel is started and the other reels are accelerated until the positional relationship between the one reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the change amount determination lottery. The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by delaying the start of. Furthermore, the change amount determination lottery determines one change time from a plurality of different change times instead of the number of symbols, starts acceleration of one reel, and the positional relationship between one reel and another reel The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by delaying the start of acceleration of the other reels until the change time won in the change amount determination lottery elapses.

  Also, in Example 3, the amount of change with respect to the current position for each reel is randomly determined in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols, respectively, and a change amount determination lottery is performed. The relative positional relationship of these three reels is determined, and the relationship with the positional relationship of each reel becomes more irregular, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. It is possible to make the relative positional relationship between the reels more irregular.

  In addition, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, since the total number of random numbers is a random number that is relatively prime, the update period between the random numbers is the least common multiple of the total number of random numbers. Thus, the amount of change in each reel can be more varied than in the case where random numbers having the same period are used. As a result, even when the reel effect control is performed so that “white 7” is aligned on a straight line, the position relationship in the reel effect control is enabled when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated. Can be avoided as much as possible.

  In Example 3, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the same change amount is difficult to be determined as the change amount of each reel by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. However, for example, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update cycle is used, a random number whose start value is randomly changed every cycle for each random number Even when the same change amount is difficult to be determined as the change amount of each reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained by using or changing the timing of performing the lot change determination lot determination for each reel.

  In addition, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the total amount of each random number is a relatively random number, so that the amount of change in each reel is larger than when random numbers with the same period are used. In addition to the variation in the reel, each time the reel effect control is performed, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the same change amount combination is determined as the combination of the change amounts of each reel. Each time the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated, the positional relationship between the reels is prevented from being biased, that is, the positional relationship after reel effect control is not likely to become the same positional relationship. it can.

  Also, in Example 3, it takes a longer time than a general game shop business time to synchronize the next three random numbers after synchronizing once, and the same player plays a game on the same day. Even when the reel effect control is performed more than once, the positional relationship after the reel effect control does not become the same positional relationship. In addition, when performing the reel effect control, when the change amount determination lottery is performed, it is a rare phenomenon that the combination of the same random numbers in the previous time is extracted. If it takes more than one game, that is, a configuration in which three random numbers are not synchronized more than once during one game, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R each time the reel effect control is performed. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when the operation is activated, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect control is not likely to be the same positional relationship.

  In Example 3, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the amount of change for each reel is performed each time the reel effect control is performed by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. However, for example, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update period is used, the change amount is determined each time the reel effect control is performed. By shifting the timing for performing the determination lottery (for example, when the change amount determination lottery is performed before the reel production control, the change amount determination lottery is performed after the reel production control when the reel production control is performed next time), When the reel change control is performed, it is difficult to determine the same change amount combination as the change amount combination of each reel. Even obtained the same effect as described above.

  In addition, the change amount determination lottery of Example 3 is a configuration in which the change amount for the current position is randomly determined for each reel in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols corresponding to the pull-in range. The range of the change amount is not limited to the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols exemplified above, and a range beyond that may be applied, or a range less than that, for example, 0 to 0 A range allocated to one symbol may be applied. As described above, the range determined when the change time is determined by the change amount determination lottery can be arbitrarily selected as in the case of the number of symbols.

  In Example 3, the relative positional relationship between these three reels after the reel effect control is determined by performing a change amount determination lottery for randomly determining the amount of change with respect to the current position for each reel. The relative positional relationship of these three reels after reel production control is determined by performing a lottery that randomly determines the positional relationship of any other reel with respect to any one reel for each remaining reel. May be determined.

  In addition, a positional relationship determination lottery is performed in which any positional relationship is randomly selected from the relative positional relationships between a plurality of reels that are set differently in advance, and the selected positional relationship is determined after the reel effect control. It is good also as a structure determined as a relative positional relationship of three reels. For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the relative position for each symbol unit of the middle reel when the left reel is the reference, and the relative position for each symbol unit of the right reel when the left reel and the middle reel are the reference What is necessary is just to determine any one positional relationship from these positional relationships by the positional relationship determination lottery. In this way, a positional relationship determination lottery that randomly selects one of the positional relationships from the relative positional relationship between the reels that are determined in advance so as to be different is performed, and the selected positional relationship is determined after the reel effect control. By determining the relative positional relationship between these three reels, after the reel effect control, the positional relationship between the reels when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated is biased. Can be prevented.

(Iv) Example 4
In the above-described example 1, the reel effect control is configured to perform the control to rotate the reels synchronously so that the combination of the same symbols is aligned on the three rotating reels. As a control, the reels are synchronized so that the same symbol combination is aligned on three rotating reels, and the same symbol combination is swung up and down over a predetermined time within a range displayed in the fluoroscopic window 3. Control to move the reel is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control after performing initial position detection control in the same manner as in Example 1. In reel production control, while maintaining the rotation of the reels, the relative positional relationship between the reels is controlled so that the corresponding symbols are aligned, and after the corresponding symbols are aligned, these When the symbol moves to the area corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3, the control of moving each reel so as to wave up and down within the range displayed in the fluoroscopic window 3 is performed for a predetermined time.

  Next, after the reel effect control, the main CPU 41a performs the initial position return control as in the first example. In the initial position return control, while rotating the reels, the relative positions of the reels are set so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship of the reels at the start of the reel rotation specified in the initial position detection control. Control the positional relationship.

  Next, as in Example 1, the main CPU 41a performs initial position notification control after the initial position return control. In the initial position notification control, the reels are rotated at the stop positions where the reels were stopped at the start of the reel rotation after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of the reel rotation. Is temporarily stopped, the player is informed that it has returned to the initial position, and then the reel starts to rotate again while maintaining the initial positional relationship.

  Then, after the initial position notification control, the main CPU 41a accelerates the rotation speed of the reel, and validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the rotation speed is constant.

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 4, for example, in the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed after the game is started, for example, “White 7” symbols are arranged. Thus, since the reel effect control is performed to display these symbols while moving up and down over a predetermined time, it is possible to perform an effect with an impact in the reel variation mode during the freeze period.

  In addition, when reel effect control is performed to display a specific symbol in the display area for a predetermined time as described above, the symbol that the player desires to draw after starting the rotation from the state where the specific symbol is displayed By knowing the timing up to the pull-in range, it is possible to perform a stop operation within the pull-in range of the symbol desired by the player without timing from the reel fluctuation mode, and no reel effect control is performed. In this case, that is, when the reel starts rotating in a state where a specific symbol is not displayed in the display area, an operation aiming at the symbol desired by the player becomes easier. In this way, by performing reel effect control, a certain regularity is created between the start of rotation of the reel from the state in which the specific symbol is displayed and the stop operation of the reel, so that the reel stop operation is performed. The degree of technical intervention may change.

  On the other hand, in Example 4, initial position detection control for specifying the initial position at the start of rotation of the three reels is performed, and after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated. In addition, each reel is returned to the initial position where it was stopped at the start of reel rotation. For example, when reel effect control is performed to display a state where “white 7” is arranged for a predetermined time. However, even if such reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the reel stop operation by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. The difficulty level of will never change. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the stop position of each reel is returned to the same stop position as when the reel was stopped in the previous game, that is, the stop position without regularity. If the reel production control is not performed, a certain regularity that does not occur is not born, and the slot machine has the gaming property that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. It will not be damaged.

  In Example 4, as special variation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area, for example, reel effect control that is displayed while moving up and down for a predetermined time in a state where “white 7” is arranged, that is, for a predetermined time. Control is applied to display a specific symbol while moving it within the display area. For example, the specific symbol is stopped at a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 for a predetermined time, or the specific symbol is not stopped. When passing through a position corresponding to the see-through window 3, control may be applied to rotate at a slower speed than other symbols pass through.

  In Example 4, before the reel effect control, the three reels that are stopped are synchronously rotated in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. Initial position detection control for specifying an initial position at the start of reel rotation is performed. Based on the initial position specified based on the initial position detection control, after the reel effect control, operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R The control to return each reel to the initial position that was stopped at each reel at the start of reel rotation was made before the activation of the reel. Hold the stop position of each reel at the end of the next game until the end of the next game, and stop after reel effect control based on the hold position of each reel held Switch 8L, 8C, before the operation of the 8R is enabled, it may be configured to perform control to return the reels to the initial position that has been stopped in the reels at the start reel rotation.

  Further, in Example 4, the configuration includes a plurality of reels. However, in the configuration including only one reel, even when the reel effect control is performed in which a specific symbol is displayed for a predetermined period, the stop is performed thereafter. Even when reel production control is performed by adopting a configuration in which each reel is controlled to return to the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the start of reel rotation before the switch operation is validated, Even if the reel effect control is not performed, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, the difficulty of the reel stop operation does not change, and the player performs the reel effect control by performing the reel effect control. The playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired.

(V) Example 5
In the example 3, the reel effect control is configured to perform the control of rotating the reels in synchronization so that the combination of the same symbols is aligned on the three rotating reels, but the example 5 is the same as in the example 4. As a reel effect control, the reels are synchronized so that the same symbol combination is aligned on the three rotating reels, and the same symbol combination is swung up and down for a predetermined time within the range displayed in the fluoroscopic window 3. In this way, control is performed to move each reel.

  In Example 5, as shown in FIG. 30, the main CPU 41a starts reel effect control immediately after the start of the game when controlling to the freeze state. In addition, when winning the freeze lottery, the acceleration time required for the acceleration control until the constant speed rotation is completed for each reel at the same time, that is, before the reel effect control is started, after the reel effect control is finished. Acceleration time determination processing is performed at random.

  In the acceleration time determination process, an acceleration time determination lottery is performed in which the acceleration time of each reel is randomly determined in the range of T (shortest acceleration time) +0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms. In Example 5, it takes about 38 ms for the reel to move one symbol during constant speed rotation where the stop operation is effective, so that one of these acceleration times is selected, resulting in constant speed rotation. At the time, a shift of 4 symbols at maximum occurs.

  In the acceleration time determination lottery, a lottery is performed using random numbers having different total update ranges for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel. Specifically, as in the change amount determination lottery, random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 996 are used in the lottery that determines the acceleration time of the left reel, and 0 to 997 in the lottery that determines the acceleration time of the middle reel. In the lottery for determining the acceleration time of the right reel, random numbers updated in the range of 0 to 998 are used.

  Both of these random numbers are soft random numbers that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. However, since the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, random numbers are used. The update cycle between each other is difficult to synchronize.

  On the other hand, as with the change amount determination lottery, in the acceleration time determination lottery, T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms are won in almost equal proportions for all reels. Thus, since the update cycle of random numbers is not synchronized, the same acceleration time is difficult to be determined as the acceleration time of each reel.

  Similarly to the change amount determination lottery, the next three random numbers will synchronize after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually around 13 hours. The same random number combination is not extracted and the change amount determination lottery is not performed, and each time the reel effect control is performed, it is difficult to determine the same acceleration time combination as the combination of the acceleration times of each reel.

  The main CPU 41a determines the acceleration times of these three reels by performing respective acceleration time determination lotteries.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control, and thereafter performs acceleration control for accelerating each reel to constant speed rotation based on the result of the acceleration time determination lottery as shown in FIG. In the acceleration control, after starting the acceleration of each reel, control is performed to accelerate each reel so as to reach a constant speed rotation in an acceleration time determined for each reel.

  Thereby, the timing which reaches | attains constant speed rotation between each reel becomes random, and also the positional relationship of each reel arranged in reel effect control also becomes a random positional relationship.

  The main CPU 41a validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed by the acceleration control.

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 5, after the game is started, in the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed, for example, the pattern of “white 7” is arranged. Since the reel effect control for displaying these symbols while moving up and down for a predetermined time is performed, an effect with an impact can be performed in the manner of reel change during the freeze period.

  Further, in Example 5, when these symbols are displayed in a state where the symbols of “white 7” are arranged by reel effect control, the acceleration time until the constant speed rotation is changed at random thereafter. When it is difficult to predict the timing at which symbols exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in due to the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration, when reel effect control is performed to display the state where "white 7" is arranged for a predetermined time However, compared with the case where such reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective after that, the stop operation of the reels by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. The difficulty is never extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  In Example 5, as the special variation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area, the reel effect control for displaying while moving up and down for a predetermined time in a state where “white 7” is arranged, that is, specifying for a predetermined time. Is applied to control the display to be displayed while being moved within the display area. For example, the control to stop the specific design at a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 for a predetermined time, or the specific design to be stopped is not performed. When passing through a position corresponding to the see-through window 3, a control of rotating at a slower speed than passing through other symbols may be applied.

  Also, in Example 5, when these symbols are displayed in a state where “white 7” symbols are lined up by the reel effect control, the acceleration time until the constant speed rotation thereafter is randomly changed for each reel. In addition to the timing to reach constant speed rotation, the positional relationship between the reels arranged in the reel effect control is also a random positional relationship, but one acceleration time determined at random May be applied as the acceleration time for all reels, and even with such a configuration, it is difficult to predict the timing at which symbols exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in, based on the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration. Therefore, even when the reel effect control is performed, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8 are thereafter compared with the case where the reel effect control is not performed. After the operation is enabled, there is no such thing as difficulty reel stop operation is extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  Further, in Example 5, the configuration includes a plurality of reels. However, in the configuration including only one reel, even when reel effect control is performed in which a specific symbol is displayed for a predetermined period, The acceleration time until starting constant speed rotation is changed at random, and the timing at which symbols exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in is predicted based on the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration. Therefore, even when the reel effect control is performed, it is more difficult to stop the reel after the stop switch operation becomes effective than when the reel effect control is not performed. The degree does not become extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  Further, in Example 5, regardless of the positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game, after the reel effect control, the player performs the reel effect control by randomly changing the acceleration time of each reel. Since it is a configuration in which the playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired, after the start of the game, without performing control to detect the positional relationship between each reel, that is, The reel effect control can be started immediately without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  Further, in Example 5, the acceleration time determination process for randomly determining the acceleration time applied to the acceleration control after the end of the reel effect control is performed at the stage before the reel effect control is started. That is, the process for determining whether or not to perform the reel effect control and the acceleration time determining process can be performed continuously without interposing the reel effect control, and the flow of the process can be simplified and the reel Immediately after the effect control is finished, the control can be shifted to the acceleration control.

  In Example 5, the acceleration time determination process is performed before the reel effect control is started. However, the acceleration time determination process is performed after the reel effect control, and the acceleration control is performed based on the result. However, with such a configuration, it is not necessary to hold data for specifying the acceleration time of each reel used in the acceleration control over the reel production control period. For example, during the reel production control period Even when the power is interrupted, the amount of data held until the power is restored can be reduced.

  Further, in Example 5, the change amount determination lottery for randomly determining the acceleration time of each reel is performed for each reel so that the acceleration time of each of these three reels after the reel effect control is determined. Thus, the relationship with the acceleration time of each reel becomes more irregular, and the time from the start of acceleration to the constant speed rotation can be made more irregular.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, since the total number of each random number uses a random number, the update period of each random number is the least common multiple of the total number of each random number. As compared with the case where random numbers having the same period are used, the acceleration time in each reel can be more varied.

  In Example 5, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the same acceleration time as the acceleration time of each reel is difficult to be determined by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. However, for example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, even if random numbers having the same update period are used, random numbers whose start values are randomly changed for each period for each random number Even if the same acceleration time is not easily determined as the acceleration time of each reel by using or shifting the timing for performing the lottery determination for each reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, so that the acceleration time for each reel is larger than when random numbers with the same period are used. In addition to the fact that each reel effect control is performed, the rate at which the same acceleration time combination is determined as the combination of the acceleration times of each reel can be reduced, so that the reel effect control is performed. Every time the reel effect control is performed, the acceleration time from the start of acceleration to the constant speed rotation is biased, that is, the combination of the acceleration times for each reel after the reel effect control is likely to be the same combination. Can be prevented.

  Further, in Example 5, it takes a longer time than a general game shop business time to synchronize the next three random numbers after synchronizing once, and the same player plays a game on the same day. Even when the reel effect control is performed more than once, the combination of the acceleration times after the reel effect control is not the same combination. In addition, when performing the reel effect control, when the acceleration time determination lottery is performed, it is a rare phenomenon that the combination of the same random numbers in the previous time is extracted. If it takes more than one game, that is, if three random numbers are not synchronized twice or more during one game, acceleration is performed after reel effect control every time reel effect control is performed. It is possible to prevent the acceleration time from the start to the constant speed rotation from being biased, that is, the combination of the acceleration times for each reel after the reel effect control is likely to be the same combination.

  In Example 5, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the acceleration time of each reel is controlled every time the reel effect control is performed by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. For example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update period is used, the acceleration time is performed every time the reel effect control is performed. By shifting the timing for performing the determination lottery (for example, when the acceleration time determination lottery is performed before the reel production control, the acceleration time determination lottery is performed after the reel production control when the next reel production control is performed), Each time the reel effect control is performed, the same combination of acceleration times is determined as the combination of acceleration times of each reel. Even when the have configured obtained the same effect as described above.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery of Example 5, the acceleration time for each reel is in the range of T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms, which causes a shift of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols corresponding to the pull-in range. Although it is a configuration determined at random, the range of acceleration time is not limited to the range of T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms exemplified above, and more ranges may be applied, A lesser range, eg, a range assigned for 0-38 ms, may be applied.

  Further, in Example 5, the acceleration time determination lottery for randomly determining the acceleration time for each reel is performed, whereby the acceleration time of these three reels after the reel effect control is determined. The acceleration time of these three reels after the reel effect control may be determined by performing a lottery that randomly determines the difference of the acceleration time of the other reel with respect to the acceleration time of one reel.

  In addition, an acceleration time combination determination lottery in which any combination is randomly selected from a plurality of combinations of acceleration times determined in advance so as to be different is performed, and after reel effect control based on the selected combination of acceleration times Such a configuration may be adopted in which acceleration control of these three reels is performed, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a bias from occurring in the acceleration time for each of the plurality of reels after the reel effect control.

(Vi) Example 6
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control content of the post-reel effect acceleration process executed by the main control unit 41 after the end of the reel effect control accompanying the controlled freezing state. The reel effect control in Example 6 is, for example, control in which the reels are rotated synchronously so that the same symbol combinations are aligned on three rotating reels (the range in which the same symbol combinations are displayed in the perspective window 3). And control for moving each reel so as to wave up and down over a predetermined time). The reel effect control in Examples 7 to 9 shown below is the same as that in Example 6.

  In the post-reel effect acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all reels are stopped (S1), and waits until all reels are stopped. In Example 6, all reels are controlled to be stopped after the reel effect control is finished. In S1, it is determined whether or not such a state is controlled. This also applies to the post-reel acceleration processing in Examples 7 to 9 described below.

  After it is determined in step S1 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S2). ). As shown in FIG. 32, the left delay random number (Lr) is a random number for left delay that is incremented and updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 996 (total number 997) every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The medium delay random number value (Cr) extracted from the counter is added from the random number counter for medium delay in the range of 0 to 997 (total number 998) every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The extracted random number for right delay (Rr) is extracted from the random counter for left delay that is incremented and updated one by one in the range of 0 to 998 (total number 999) every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The

  Next, based on the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) extracted in step S2, the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel A timer value (Ct) and a right reel timer value (Rt) are calculated and set in the RAM 507 (S3).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the left reel timer value (Lt) is a value obtained by dividing the left delay random number value (Lr) by 21, and the middle reel timer value (Ct) is The middle delay random value (Cr) divided by 21 is a surplus value, and the right reel timer value (Rt) is a surplus value obtained by dividing the right delay random value (Rr) by 21. Both values are 0-20.

  Next, a reel delay command that can specify the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in step S3 is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S4).

  The reel delay command is a command that can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective after the reel effect control executed in the freeze state is performed. is there. More specifically, left, middle, and right reel timer values that can specify the delay time of each reel are stored, and each reel starts to rotate by taking into account the acceleration time of the reel on the sub-control unit 91 side. This is a command that can specify the timing, the timing of constant speed rotation, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid, and is transmitted before starting the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first after the reel effect. In this example, an example in which a reel delay command is output separately from the freeze command will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which each reel starts to rotate before starting the freeze, and constant speed rotation. And a timing at which the stop operation becomes valid, and a freeze command including such information may be output when the freeze is started. It should be noted that the reel delay command is applied in the same manner as in Example 6 in Examples 7 to 9 shown below.

  Accompanying the reception of the reel delay command, the sub-control unit 91 identifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reel. It becomes possible.

  Next, the rotation start of the left reel is set, and after starting the rotation of the left reel (S5), it is determined whether the acceleration of the left reel is completed, that is, whether the left reel is rotated at a constant speed. (S6).

  Here, a method for determining whether or not the reel has been rotated at a constant speed will be described. When the main controller 41 starts rotating the reel, the reel motor is accelerated by switching a plurality of control states with different step widths of the reel motor, and finally the step width control state during constant speed rotation is performed. After reaching, control is performed to maintain this step width. At this time, the main control unit 41 sets a control flag indicating the control state of each stage in the RAM 507, and switches the control state by referring to the control flag. Whether or not the reel has been rotated at a constant speed is determined based on whether or not a control flag indicating a control state of the step width at the time of constant speed rotation is set. If the control flag is set, the reel Is determined to have a constant speed rotation.

  The method for determining whether or not the reel has rotated at a constant speed is not limited to this. For example, the time from when the reference position of the reel is detected until the next reference position is detected is measured. Is configured to determine that the reel has been rotated at a constant speed by matching with the time during constant speed rotation more than the specified number of times, that is, whether the speed of the reel is physically detected and whether or not the constant speed rotation has been determined. It is good also as composition to do.

  After it is determined in step S6 that acceleration of the left reel is completed, a value obtained by multiplying the timer value for left reel set in step S3 by 60 is set in the delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S7). ), And waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S8).

  When the counter value for delay becomes 0 in the step of S8, the rotation start of the middle reel is set, and after the rotation of the middle reel is started (S9), whether or not the acceleration of the middle reel is completed, that is, the middle reel is It is determined whether or not the rotation speed is constant (S10).

  Since the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed, ((left reel timer value × 60) × 0.56) The time of ms will be timed. Further, as described above, the timer value for the left reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 6, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move one symbol. , Rotation of the middle reel starts at a timing from 0 to one reel.

  After it is determined in step S10 that the middle reel has been accelerated, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by multiplying the middle reel timer value set in step S3 by 60 (S11). Wait until the counter value reaches 0 (S12).

  When the counter value for delay becomes 0 in the step of S12, the rotation start of the right reel is set, and after starting the rotation of the right reel (S13), whether or not the acceleration of the right reel is completed, that is, the right reel is It is determined whether or not the rotation speed is constant (S14).

  As described above, the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed. ((Timer value for middle reel × 60 ) /0.56) ms will be timed, the timer value for the middle reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and it takes about 33.6 ms in Example 6 for the reel to move one symbol. Therefore, the rotation of the right reel starts at the timing from 0 to one reel after the completion of the acceleration of the middle reel.

  After determining that the acceleration of the right reel is completed in step S14, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by multiplying the timer value for right reel set in step S3 by 60 (S15), and the delay timer is set. Wait until the counter value reaches 0 (S16).

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in the step of S16, the stop operation is set to be enabled. Accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is enabled (S17), and the post-reel acceleration processing is finished.

  As described above, the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed ((right reel timer value × 60 ) /0.56) ms time is counted, and the timer value for the right reel is in the range of 0 to 20, and it takes about 33.6 ms in Example 6 for the reel to move one symbol. Therefore, after the acceleration of the right reel is completed, the reel stop operation becomes effective at a timing from 0 to one reel.

  After the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state is completed, the post-reel effect acceleration process is executed, so that the left reel is rotated from the state where all reels are stopped as shown in FIG. When the left reel delay time (left reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms) that fluctuates in the range from 0 to the first rotation of the reel has elapsed, the rotation of the middle reel starts. When the middle reel delay time (medium reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms), which varies from 0 to one reel rotation, has elapsed, the right reel When the right reel delay time (right reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms), which fluctuates in a range from the time when rotation starts at a constant speed to the time when the reel makes one revolution, each reel Stop operation is enabled.

  Thus, in Example 6, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a specific positional relationship, that is, “white 7-white 7-white” in the freeze state in which the activation of the stop operation is delayed after the game is started. Since the reel effect control is performed so that the combination of “7” is aligned in a straight line, an effect with an impact can be performed in the reel variation mode in the frozen state.

  In Example 6, rotation 3 is performed as special variation control for performing variation control of the plurality of variable display regions so that the relative positional relationship between the display bands constituting the plurality of variable display regions becomes a specific positional relationship. Reel effect control is applied to stop the reels so that the same symbol combinations are aligned on one reel. However, the present invention is not limited to such effects, and the same symbol combinations are simply aligned on three reels. It is also possible to apply an effect that simply rotates in a synchronized state. In addition, the combination of the same symbols is not only a straight line, but also a combination of different symbols, but with the symbols displayed in the perspective window, the player can win a specific role or a navigation stock. It is also possible to apply an effect of stopping display modes that can be suggested (for example, reach eyes, chance eyes, etc.) or synchronously rotating in that state.

  Further, as described above, after performing reel effect control in which the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a specific positional relationship, for example, “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged, the reels are maintained in the positional relationship as they are. If the player's stop operation is enabled, if the player operates the top switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an appropriate and continuous manner, the timing at which the stop operation is first performed is accidentally within the “white 7” pull-in range. For example, the timing of the stop operation of the other reels is also likely to be the “white 7” pull-in range, and the reel positional control is not performed, that is, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is the specific positional relationship. If this is not the case, the possibility that “white 7-white 7-white 7” will be aligned is increased compared to the case where the player appropriately operates the top switches 8L, 8C, 8R continuously. It becomes. In this way, by performing the reel effect control, a certain regularity is created between the relative positional relationship between the reels and the reel stop operation, thereby changing the degree of technical intervention of the reel stop operation. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in Example 6, after the reel effect, all of the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and after that, after one reel starts to rotate, the time until the next reel starts rotating randomly changes. Thus, after the reel effect, before the stop operation is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed randomly, and the specific symbols are arranged in a straight line. Even if the reel effect is performed or not, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective. . That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  In addition, the reel delay command that can determine the reel timer value that is randomly determined for each reel at a stage prior to the start of the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and that can determine the determined reel timer value. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 6, after the reel effect, all reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  Further, in Example 6, the stop operation becomes effective after the delay time for the right reel has elapsed after the completion of the acceleration of the right reel at which the rotation starts last, but the acceleration of the right reel at which the rotation starts last. Even when the stop operation is validated immediately after completion, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a random positional relationship, and the stop operation may be validated at this point.

  In Example 6, the rotation is started in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the rotation of the reels may be started in another predetermined order, or the reel rotation start order. A configuration in which is changed may be used.

  Further, in Example 6, after the reel effect, the reel timer value that randomly varies for all the reels is determined at a stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first, and the determined reel timer A reel delay command that can specify a value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, the reel delay command fluctuates randomly for all reels at least before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first is started. If the reel timer value is determined and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effect as described above can be obtained. For example, a game start operation At the timing when the game is started, that is, before the game is controlled to be frozen. Even when the reel timer value that fluctuates to the predetermined value is determined, and the reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 performs the rotation of each reel as described above. Without sending a command to that effect at every start or every acceleration completion, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective. Thus, it is possible to control production and the like in accordance with the specified timing.

  Further, in Example 6, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 6, since the delay time is set until the rotation of the next reel is started after the acceleration of one reel is completed, a counter for measuring the delay time for each reel is provided in the RAM 507. The delay time for each reel can be measured only by assigning a common delay timer counter to all the reels. In particular, in the configuration in which the time is counted by subtracting the counter value every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed every 0.56 ms is executed as in Example 6, the delay of the time that the reel makes one turn at maximum When setting the time, an 11-bit area capable of storing the maximum value (20) × 60 = 1260 of the reel timer value, which is substantially a 2-byte area, is required. Although a 6-byte area is actually required, even if 1 byte is allocated as each of the left, middle, and right reel timer value areas as in Example 6, the common delay timer counter area and In total, an area of 4 bytes is sufficient.

  The example 6 is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a delay timer counter is assigned to each reel.

  In Example 6, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by multiplying the reel timer value by 60, which is the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves, is executed. Every time the interrupt process (main) is executed, the delay timer counter value is decremented by one to count the delay time, so the timer interrupt process (main) is executed for the delay time measurement. It is not necessary to perform different processing for each number of times, and the processing can be made common without providing a branch with respect to the number of times of the timer interrupt processing (main) with respect to the delay time counting.

  The number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves is executed / N (N is a natural number, and the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves) The value obtained by multiplying the number of executions by the reel timer value is set in the delay timer counter, and the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed N times. The delay time counter may be configured so that the delay timer counter does not need to be updated every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the timer that counts the time The load of the interrupt process (main) can be reduced, and the capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the delay timer counter can be reduced.

  Further, the timer counter value for delay is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed M times (number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves). Therefore, the delay time counter may not be updated every time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, and the timer allocation related to the timing is not necessary. The load of the loading process (main) can be reduced, and the capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the delay timer counter can be further reduced.

  In Example 6, the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, the left delay random value (Lr) for setting the right reel timer value, the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value are set. Since the numerical value (Rr) is extracted using a random number counter for left delay, a random number for middle delay, and a random number counter for right delay, each having a different update range, a random number counter with the same update range for each reel. Compared with the case where it is used, the delay time corresponding to each reel can be more varied. As a result, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, there is regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is activated. Avoid as much as possible.

  Also, as these random number counters, soft random number counters that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed are used. Because it is used, it does not synchronize until the update cycle of each random number counter becomes the least common multiple of the total number of update ranges of each random number counter, compared with the case where a random number counter of the same cycle is used, Each time the reel effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when the stop operation is validated, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect is not likely to be the same. As a result, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, there is regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is activated. It can be avoided more reliably.

  Further, the least common multiple that 997, 998, and 999, which are the total number of each random number counter, is synchronized is 994010994. In Example 6, each random number is updated every timer interrupt process (main), Since the interval is 0.56 ms and is updated about 1786 times per second, the next three random numbers will be synchronized after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually Since it is about 13 hours, the same random number combination is not extracted during the day, and the left, middle and right reel timer values are not calculated.

  That is, it takes a longer time than the general game store business hours to synchronize the values of the next three random number counters once synchronized, and the same player plays a game on the same day at least twice. Even when the reel effect is performed, the positional relationship after the reel effect is not the same. In addition, when setting the left, middle, and right reel timer values for the reel production, it is a rare phenomenon that the same combination of the same random numbers is extracted. If it takes more than one game to synchronize the random numbers, that is, if the three random numbers do not synchronize more than once during one game, the stop operation is effective every time the reel effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when being converted, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect is likely to be the same positional relationship. As a result, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, there is regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is activated. Furthermore, it can avoid reliably.

  In Example 6, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), the right delay random value for setting the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value. A numerical value (Rr) is extracted using a random number counter for left delay, a random number for middle delay, and a random number counter for right delay, each having a different update range, but at least a random number counter having a different update range or update rule is used. In the case of a configuration, as in the case described above, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, the positional relationship after the reel effect is regular when the stop operation is activated. Can be avoided as much as possible.

  Hereinafter, an example in which random counter values having different update rules are used as the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this example, the RAM 507 stores the current left reel timer value LT, the previous left reel timer value bLT, the current middle reel timer value CT, the previous middle reel timer value bCT, and the current right reel timer value RT. The previous right reel timer value bRT is assigned. Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the calculation shown in FIG. 34 is performed, and the above values are updated.

  Specifically, first, the LT value is updated by adding 13 (which may be a predetermined prime number) to the bLT value, dividing the added value by 21, and updating the value to the remainder. Next, the value of CT is updated by adding the value of LT to the value of bCT and dividing the value after the addition by 21. Next, the RT value is updated to the value obtained by adding the CT value to the bRT value and dividing the added value by 21.

  The main control unit 41 extracts the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value when performing the post-reel acceleration process, and at the time of delaying these extracted values, respectively. Set to timer counter.

  In this example, the timer value for the left reel, the timer value for the middle reel, and the timer value for the right reel are extracted using random number counters having different update rules, so that the specific symbols are arranged in a straight line. Even when the reel effect is performed, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is validated as much as possible.

  Further, the value of the random number counter is 0 to 20, and can be used as it is as the timer value for the left reel, the timer value for the middle reel, and the timer value for the right reel, so that the load related to the calculation or processing of the value can be reduced. .

(Vii) Example 7
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of the post-reel effect acceleration process executed after the end of the reel effect associated with the main control unit 41 being controlled to be frozen in Example 7.

  In the post-reel effect acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all reels are stopped (S101), and waits until all reels are stopped.

  After it is determined in step S101 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S102). ).

  Next, based on the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) extracted in step S102, the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel A timer value (Ct) and a right reel timer value (Rt) are calculated and set in the RAM 507 (S103).

  Next, a reel delay command that can specify the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in the step of S103 is transmitted as the transmission data of the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S104). Accordingly, the sub-control unit 91 can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reels.

  Next, the delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 is set to a value obtained by adding 240 to the value obtained by multiplying the timer value for the left reel set in step S103 by 60 (S105), and the rotation start of the left reel is set. After setting and starting the rotation of the left reel (S106), it waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S107).

  Here, 240, which is added to the value obtained by multiplying the left reel timer value by 60, is a timer interrupt process (until acceleration is completed after the reel starts rotating, that is, until acceleration is completed). In step S107, the process waits until the time that is the sum of the reel acceleration time and the delay time based on the left reel timer value elapses.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in step S107, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by adding 240 to the value obtained by multiplying the intermediate reel timer value set in step S103 by 60 (S108). After setting the rotation start of the middle reel and starting the rotation of the middle reel (S109), it waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S110). That is, it waits until the time which combined the acceleration time of a reel and the delay time based on the timer value for middle reels passes.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in step S110, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by adding 240 to the value obtained by multiplying the right reel timer value set in step S103 by 60 (S111), The right reel rotation start is set, and after the right reel starts rotating (S112), the process waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S113). That is, it waits until the time which combined the acceleration time of a reel and the delay time based on the timer value for right reels passes.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in the step of S113, the stop operation is set to be enabled, and accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is enabled (S114), and the post-reel acceleration processing is finished.

  In Example 7, after the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state is completed, the post-reel effect acceleration process is executed, so that all the reels are stopped from the stopped state as shown in FIG. The reel rotation starts and the left reel delay time (left reel timer) fluctuates between the acceleration time from the start of the rotation of the left reel to the rotation of the left reel at a constant speed and the range from 0 to one revolution of the reel. Value × 60 × 0.56 ms), the middle reel starts to rotate, and the acceleration time from when the middle reel starts to the middle reel to constant speed rotation is constant. At the time when the sum of the intermediate reel delay time (medium reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms) that fluctuates in the range from 0 to the time when the reel makes one revolution has elapsed, Start spinning and right Acceleration time from the start of rotation of the right reel to the constant speed rotation of the right reel and right reel delay time varying from the time of the constant speed rotation to 0 to one reel rotation (right reel timer value) The stop operation of each reel becomes effective when the total time of (× 60 × 0.56 ms) has elapsed.

  As described above, in Example 7, after the reel effect, all of the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and then the time from the start of rotation of one reel to the start of rotation of the next reel is changed randomly. After the reel production, before the stop operation is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed randomly, and the reel production is such that a specific pattern is arranged in a straight line. Even when such a reel effect is not performed, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective. That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  In addition, the reel delay command that can determine the reel timer value that is randomly determined for each reel at a stage prior to the start of the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and that can determine the determined reel timer value. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 7, after the reel effect, all reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  In addition, the example 7 is configured such that the stop operation becomes effective after the sum of the acceleration time of the right reel and the delay time with respect to the right reel has elapsed after the rotation of the right reel that has started to rotate last. Even if the stop operation is enabled immediately after the acceleration time of the right reel that starts rotating at the end, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a random positional relationship, so the stop operation is effective at this point. It is good also as a structure to make.

  Further, in Example 7, the rotation is started in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the rotation of the reels may be started in another predetermined order, or the reel rotation start order. A configuration in which is changed may be used.

  Further, in Example 7, after the reel effect, the reel timer value that fluctuates randomly for all the reels is determined at a stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first, and the determined reel timer A reel delay command that can specify a value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, the reel delay command fluctuates randomly for all reels at least before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first is started. If the reel timer value is determined and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effect as described above can be obtained. For example, a game start operation At the timing when the game is started, that is, before the game is controlled to be frozen. Even when the reel timer value that fluctuates to the predetermined value is determined, and the reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 performs the rotation of each reel as described above. Without sending a command to that effect at every start or every acceleration completion, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective. Thus, it is possible to control production and the like in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 7, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 7, since the acceleration time and delay time for the next reel are set after the measurement of the acceleration time and delay time for one reel is completed, the acceleration time and delay time are measured for each reel. There is no need to assign a counter to the RAM 507, and it is possible to measure the acceleration time and delay time for each reel only by assigning a common delay timer counter to all reels. In particular, in the configuration in which the time is counted by subtracting the counter value every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed every 0.56 ms is executed as in Example 7, the maximum delay time for the reel to make one turn When the time obtained by adding the acceleration time to the time is set, an 11-bit area capable of storing the maximum value (20) × 60 + 240 = 1500 of the reel timer value is required, which is substantially a 2-byte area. If each reel is provided, an area of 6 bytes is actually required. However, as shown in Example 7, even if 1 byte is assigned as each of the left, middle and right reel timer value areas, it is common. In other words, the delay timer counter area of 4 bytes is sufficient.

  The example 7 is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a delay timer counter is assigned to each reel.

(Viii) Example 8
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control content of the post-reel effect acceleration process executed after the end of the reel effect associated with the main control unit 41 being controlled to be frozen in Example 8.

  In the post-reel effect acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (S201), and waits until all the reels are stopped.

  After it is determined in step S201 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S202). ).

  Next, based on the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) extracted in step S202, the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel The timer value (Ct) and the right reel timer value (Rt) are calculated and set in the RAM 507 (S203).

  Next, a reel delay command capable of specifying the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in step S203 is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S204). Accordingly, the sub-control unit 91 can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reels.

  Next, the delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 is set to a value obtained by multiplying the timer value for the left reel set in step S103 by 60 (S205), and waits until the delay timer counter value becomes zero (S205). S206).

  In step S206, the process waits until a delay time based on the left reel timer value elapses.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in step S206, the left reel rotation start is set, and after the left reel starts rotating (S207), the delay timer counter is set for the intermediate reel set in step S203. A value obtained by multiplying the timer value by 60 is set (S208), and the process waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S209). That is, it waits until the delay time based on the timer value for the middle reel elapses.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in the step of S209, the rotation start of the middle reel is set, and after the rotation of the middle reel is started (S210), the delay timer counter is set for the right reel set in the step of S203. A value obtained by multiplying the timer value by 60 is set (S211), and the process waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S212). That is, it waits until the delay time based on the timer value for the right reel elapses.

  When the counter value for delay becomes 0 in the step of S212, the rotation start of the right reel is set, the rotation of the right reel is started (S213), and the acceleration of the right reel is continued until the right reel rotates at a constant speed. Is completed (S214), and after the acceleration of the right reel is completed, the stop operation is set to be enabled. Accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is enabled (S215), and the post-reel acceleration processing is performed. finish.

  In Example 8, after the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state is completed, the above-described post-reel acceleration process is executed, so that as shown in FIG. When the left reel delay time (left reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms), which fluctuates in the range until the lap, elapses, the left reel starts rotating, and the left reel starts rotating from 0 to 0. When a medium reel delay time (timer value for medium reel × 60 × 0.56 ms) that fluctuates in the range until one full revolution of the reel has elapsed, the rotation of the medium reel starts and the rotation of the medium reel starts. Stop operation of each reel when the right reel rotates at a constant speed after the right reel delay time (right reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms) elapses in the range from 0 to one reel rotation Becomes effective.

  As described above, in Example 8, after the reel effect, all of the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and after that, after one reel starts to rotate, the time until the next reel starts rotating is changed randomly. After the reel production, before the stop operation is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed randomly, and the reel production is such that a specific pattern is arranged in a straight line. Even when such a reel effect is not performed, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective. That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  In addition, the reel delay command that can determine the reel timer value that is randomly determined for each reel at a stage prior to the start of the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and that can determine the determined reel timer value. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 8, after the reel effect, all the reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  Further, in Example 8, the delay time is set before the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and the left reel starts rotating after the delay time has elapsed, but the rotation starts first. Even if the delay time is not provided before the rotation of the reel to be rotated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a random positional relationship. It is good also as a structure which starts rotation immediately without providing.

  Further, in Example 8, the rotation is started in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the rotation of the reels may be started in another predetermined order, or the reel rotation start order. A configuration in which is changed may be used.

  Also, in Example 8, after the reel effect, the stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first. Specifically, at the stage before the timing of the delay time of the left reel, each reel is randomly selected. The reel timer value that fluctuates is determined, and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, at least before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first is started. In this stage, if the reel timer value that randomly varies for all the reels is determined and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effects as described above are obtained. For example, the timing at which the game is started and the game is started, that is, the timing before the freeze state is controlled. Even when the reel timer value that randomly varies for all the reels is determined and the reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control is performed as described above. The unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which constant reel rotation occurs, and the stop operation. It becomes possible to specify effective timings and to control effects and the like in accordance with the specified timings.

  Further, in Example 8, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 8, since the delay time for the next reel is set after the time measurement of the delay time for one reel is completed, a counter for measuring the delay time for each reel needs to be assigned to the RAM 507. Therefore, it is possible to measure the delay time for each reel only by assigning a common delay timer counter to all the reels. In particular, in the configuration in which the time is counted by subtracting the counter value every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed every 0.56 ms is executed as in Example 8, the maximum delay time for one reel rotation When setting the time, an 11-bit area capable of storing the maximum value (20) × 60 = 1260 of the reel timer value, which is substantially a 2-byte area, is required. Although a 6-byte area is actually required, even if 1 byte is assigned as each of the left, middle, and right reel timer value areas as in Example 8, the common delay timer counter area and In total, an area of 4 bytes is sufficient.

  The example 8 is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a delay timer counter is assigned to each reel may be employed.

(Ix) Example 9
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of the post-reel effect acceleration process that is executed after the end of the reel effect associated with the main control unit 41 being controlled to be frozen in Example 9.

  In the post-reel acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all reels are stopped (S301), and waits until all reels are stopped.

  After it is determined in step S301 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S302). ).

  Next, the left reel timer value (Lt) is calculated based on the left delay random number value (Lr) extracted in step S302, and is set in the left delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S303). The medium reel timer value (Ct) is calculated based on the medium delay random number value (Cr) extracted in step S4, and is set in the medium delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S304). A right reel timer value (Rt) is calculated based on the extracted right delay random number value (Rr) and set in the right delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S305).

  Next, a reel delay command capable of specifying the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in steps S303, S304, and S305, respectively, is serially communicated. The data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the circuit 511 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S306). Accordingly, the sub-control unit 91 can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reels.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the left reel has started rotating (S307). If the left reel has started rotating, the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, if the rotation of the left reel has not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the left delay timer counter is 0 (S308).

  If the value of the left delay timer counter is not 0 in step S308, the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, if the value of the left delay timer counter is 0, the rotation start of the left reel is set, the rotation of the left reel is started (S309), and the process proceeds to step S310.

  Here, the left delay timer counter value, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter are each one each time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed 60 times. Since the value is subtracted, the time of (left reel timer value × 0.56 × 60) ms is counted by the left delay timer counter. Further, as described above, the timer value for the left reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 9, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move by one symbol. Rotation of the left reel starts at a timing that randomly changes in the range from 0 to once around the reel.

  In step S310, it is determined whether or not the middle reel has started rotating. If the middle reel has started rotating, the process proceeds to step S313. On the other hand, if the middle reel has not started rotating, it is determined whether or not the value of the middle delay timer counter is 0 (S311).

  If the value of the middle delay timer counter is not 0 in step S311, the process proceeds to step S313. On the other hand, if the value of the middle delay timer counter is 0, the middle reel is set to start rotation. After the middle reel starts to be rotated (S312), the process proceeds to step S313.

  Here, as described above, the timer counter value (main) that is executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed 60 times for each of the left delay timer counter value, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter. Since 1 is subtracted every time, the time of (timer value for left reel × 0.56 × 60) ms is counted by the timer counter for middle delay. In addition, as described above, the timer value for the middle reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 9, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move by one symbol. Rotation of the middle reel starts at a timing that randomly changes in the range from 0 to once around the reel.

  In step S313, it is determined whether or not the right reel has started rotating. If the right reel has started rotating, the process proceeds to step S316. On the other hand, if the rotation of the right reel has not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the right delay timer counter is 0 (S314).

  If the value of the right delay timer counter is not 0 in step S314, the process proceeds to step S316. On the other hand, if the value of the right delay timer counter is 0, the rotation start of the right reel is set, the rotation of the right reel is started (S315), and the process proceeds to step S316.

  Here, as described above, the timer counter value (main) that is executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed 60 times for each of the left delay timer counter value, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter. Since 1 is subtracted every time, the time of (timer value for right reel × 0.56 × 60) ms is counted by the right delay timer counter. Also, as described above, the timer value for the right reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 9, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move one symbol. Rotation of the right reel starts at a timing that randomly changes within a range from 0 to once around the reel.

  In step S316, it is determined whether or not all reels have started rotating. If any one of the reels has not started rotating, the process returns to step S307, and all reels have started rotating. For example, the process proceeds to step S317 and waits until the acceleration of all reels is completed.

  When the acceleration of all the reels is completed in the step of S317, the stop operation is set to be valid, and accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is validated (S318), and the post-reel effect acceleration processing is ended.

  In Example 9, after the reel effect accompanying the controlled freeze state is executed, the post-reel effect acceleration process is executed, so that all reels are stopped and 0 to 1 reel as shown in FIG. When the left reel delay time (left reel timer value × 0.56 × 60 ms) that fluctuates in the range until it circulates has elapsed, the left reel starts rotating, and after all reels stop, 0 to reel 1 When the intermediate reel delay time (medium reel timer value × 0.56 × 60 ms) elapses in the range until the lap is elapsed, the middle reel starts to rotate, and after all reels stop, 0 to reel 1 After the right reel delay time (right reel timer value × 0.56 × 60 ms) that has fluctuated in the range until the lap has elapsed, the middle reel starts to rotate and all reels reach a constant speed. Stop operation of each reel becomes effective

  As described above, in Example 9, after the reel effect, all the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and the time until each reel rotates is randomly changed for each reel, so that the reel effect is stopped after the reel effect. Before the operation is activated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels changes randomly, and a reel effect is performed in which the specific symbols are arranged in a straight line. However, even if such a reel effect is not performed, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective after that. That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  Also, before starting the rotation of any of the reels, a reel timer command that randomly determines a reel timer value that randomly varies for all reels, and a reel delay command that can specify the determined reel timer value is sub-control unit 91 is transmitted. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 9, after the reel effect, all reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  Further, in Example 9, after the reel effect, the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value, which change at random, at the stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first, are respectively set. The reel delay command that can determine the determined left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Before starting, the left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value that change randomly are determined, and the determined left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value are specified. If the configuration is such that a possible reel delay command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effect as described above can be obtained. The left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value that change randomly at the timing when the game is started, that is, the timing before being controlled to the freeze state, are determined, and the determined left reel timer value and middle reel timer are determined. Even when the reel delay command capable of specifying the value and the right reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 performs the same every time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reels rotate at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation is valid, and sends the effects in accordance with these specified timings. Etc. can be controlled.

  Further, in Example 9, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 9, the timer counter for left delay is executed each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed M times (number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves). Since the delay time is counted by decrementing the middle delay timer counter and the right delay timer counter one by one, the left delay timer counter is added each time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed. There is no need to update the delay timer counter and right delay timer counter, and it is possible to reduce the load of timer interrupt processing (main) related to timing, as well as left delay timer counter, middle delay timer counter, and right delay The capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the timer counter can also be reduced.

  The number of times the timer interruption process (main) executed while one symbol moves to each of the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value / N (N is a natural number, In addition, the value obtained by multiplying the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves is divisible) is assigned to the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter. Set and count each delay time by decrementing the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter by one each time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed N times Even in such a configuration, each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter There is no need to renew, and the load of timer interrupt processing (main) related to timing can be reduced, and the capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter can be reduced. Can do.

  The left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value are each delayed by a value obtained by multiplying the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves is executed. Timer counter, middle delay timer counter, and right delay timer counter are set to the left delay timer counter, middle delay timer counter, and right delay timer counter each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The delay time may be timed by subtracting one by one, and with this structure, there is no need to perform different processing for each time of execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) for the time counting of the delay time. The processing can be shared without providing a branch with respect to the number of times of the timer interrupt processing (main) regarding the time measurement of the delay time.

  As mentioned above, although Example 1-Example 9 were demonstrated, the reel production | presentation control in the period which is generating freeze is not limited to these examples, The change in the range which does not deviate from the main point of the invention shown in each example, Needless to say, even if there is an addition, it is included in the present invention. In addition, a configuration that is the same as or similar to the other examples has the same effect as that described in the other examples. Moreover, it can apply about each example also about the modified example illustrated in the other example.

  In the example and the embodiment described above, the variable display device is configured such that the symbols are continuously changed and displayed on the see-through window 3 by rotating a reel having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer periphery. Instead of the reel, a variable display device may be used in which a belt in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery is moved to display the symbols continuously changing in the see-through window 3. Furthermore, by displaying an image in which identification information such as a pattern image is periodically moved in a predetermined order on an image display device such as a liquid crystal display, the identification information is displayed on the display screen while being continuously changed. A display device may be applied.

[About the ratio that the number of unreported games is divided and notified]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, when the number of unreported games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (40), it is less than the predetermined number of games. Although an example in which the number of unreported games is divided and notified at a high rate has been described, instead of or in addition to this, the number of currently notified games is a predetermined number of games (for example, 60 games). ) The number of unreported games may be divided and notified at a higher rate when the number of games is less than the predetermined number of games. As a result, when the number of notification games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the number of unreported games is divided and notified as much as possible, so that the number of notification games can be further increased when the number of notification games decreases. The game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19B, the time when the number of added games this time is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (40) is higher than the case where the number of additional games is less than the predetermined number of games. Although an example has been described in which the number of added games is divided and notified in this ratio, instead of or in addition to this, the number of currently notified notification games is a predetermined number of games (for example, 60 games) or more. When the number of games is less than a predetermined number of games, the number of games added this time may be divided and notified at a higher rate. As a result, when the number of notification games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the number of additional games this time is divided and notified as much as possible, so that the number of notification games can be further increased when the number of notification games decreases. The game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the number of games to be specified for specifying the distribution ratio is less than a predetermined number of games among the number of unreported games, the number of games added this time, or the number of games reported, the number of unreported games or the number of games added this time Only when the number is not less than a predetermined number of games, the number of unreported games or the number of additional games may be divided and reported only when the number is not divided and divided.

[Relationship between AT and number of notification games]
In the above-described embodiment, when the number of notifying games becomes 0 with the number of unreported games remaining, the number of additional games is always determined by the processing of S06 and S07 in FIG. 18 and added in the game. An example has been described in which the AT is terminated in the game when the control to the AT is continued and the number of informed games becomes 0 in a state where the number of unreported games does not remain. However, even when the number of informed games is 0 when the number of unreported games remains, there is a case where the number of additional games is not determined. After completing the above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of games in the range of the number of unreported games may be notified and the AT may be controlled. Predetermined conditions include, for example, digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games or a number of games randomly determined from a plurality of types), winning a predetermined winning combination, and stopping a predetermined symbol combination on the winning line It may be established by doing so. As a result, once the AT is finished, it is possible to give an impression as if it was controlled by the AT again, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the number of games to be added is not limited to the addition of the number of additional games at the timing when the number of notification games reaches 0 while the number of unreported games remains, for example, the number of notification games is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (10 games). The timing for adding the added number of games may be determined randomly using random numbers or the like. Thereby, when the number of notification games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the number of additional games will be added.

[Number of notifications by dividing and dividing]
In the embodiment described above, an example is described in which the number of AT games acquired in one AT lottery is divided and divided into multiple notifications according to the lottery result of the AT game number notification process in FIG. did. However, if the number of AT games acquired in one AT lottery is divided and notified in an extremely large number, the player may be confused. For this reason, an upper limit may be set for the number of times of dividing and informing the number of AT games acquired in one AT lottery. For example, 10 is set as the upper limit number for notifying the number of AT games acquired in one AT lottery, and all remaining AT games acquired in the one AT lottery are notified at the tenth notification. You may make it do.

[About slot machines]
In the above-described embodiment, the variable display device having the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided, and when all the reels are stopped, one game is finished, and according to the combination of the display results derived to the three reels. He explained about the slot machines where winnings occur. That is, a variable display device capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and using one game value for one game By setting a predetermined number of bets, the game can be started, and when the display result is derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas, one game is completed, and the plurality of results are obtained as a result of one game. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived in each of the variable display areas has been described. However, when a display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, one game is completed, and a prize is awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display device. As long as the slot machine can be generated, the slot machine is not limited to one having a variable display device having three reels, but has a single reel or a variable display device having a plurality of reels other than three. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet using a game ball as a game value is used. It may be a slot machine for setting a number or a fully credit type slot machine for setting a bet amount using only credit as a game value. When game balls are used as game values, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls by winning. Any of the slot machines can be used.

[Other variations]
(1) The notification game number information and the non-notification game number information may be processed to be cleared when a bonus is won, or may be processed to carry over until the bonus ends, and a predetermined number is subtracted. Or a process for adding and adding a predetermined number, or determining which process is to be performed for each bonus winning and performing the determined process It may be. Thereby, the variation when a bonus is won in a state where the number of informed games and the number of unreported games remains can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the promotion lip winning procedure, the rushing lip winning procedure, the fall replay avoidance procedure, and the “melon” of the middle reel 2C in the middle Although the example in which the stopping procedure is the pressing order of the stopping operation has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stopping operation timing may be included, and only the pressing order or only the stopping operation timing may be included. Not only a thing but what may become a pressing order + stop operation timing may be sufficient.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the falling point is derived at the time of winning the melon 1 to shift from one of RT1 to RT3 to the normal gaming state has been described. The opportunity for transition is not limited to this. For example, not only at the time of winning Melon 1, but at the time of winning a specific winning combination, when the winning of the specific winning combination (specific small combination, specific replaying combination) cannot be generated (specific And may be to win other specific winning combinations that can be won at the same time as the specific winning combination.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the example has been described in which the promotion lip is awarded to promote the game from the normal gaming state to RT2, and the rushing lip prize is entered to shift from RT2 to RT3. The opportunity to be promoted to and the opportunity to transition from RT2 to RT3 are not limited to this. For example, the symbol combination that stops only when a predetermined winning combination is missed may be stopped. Accordingly, it is possible to add an interest that the gaming state is shifted instead of missing a predetermined winning combination.

  (5) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number circuit, 43 pulse oscillator, 50 RTC, 51 liquid crystal display, 56 effect switch, 90 effect control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM.

Claims (4)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other can be displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner Is a slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
An advantageous amount setting means for setting an advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling the player in an advantageous state over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means;
Specific control means for performing specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increase advantageous amounts and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount;
Informing means for informing the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount added by the specific control means,
The notification means includes
When the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the first information for notifying the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount in a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game Notification means;
Means for notifying a plurality of times of information that can be specified for an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount in a plurality of game periods longer than the predetermined period when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means; Second informing means for informing the information a plurality of times so that the player can identify the increased advantageous amount from the information for a plurality of times in a plurality of game periods;
A slot machine in which the first notification means notifies the increase advantageous amount when the maximum amount among the plurality of increase advantageous amounts is added as the increase advantageous amount. The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other can be displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner Is a slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
An advantageous amount setting means for setting an advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling the player in an advantageous state over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means;
Specific control means for performing specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increase advantageous amounts and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount;
Informing means for informing the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount added by the specific control means,
The notification means includes
First notification means for notifying information that the player can specify for the increased advantageous amount at one timing when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means;
Means for notifying information identifiable about an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount at each of a plurality of timings when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the information from each of the plurality of timings A second notification means for notifying the information so that the player can identify the increased advantageous amount,
A slot machine in which the first notification means notifies the increase advantageous amount when the maximum amount among the plurality of increase advantageous amounts is added as the increase advantageous amount. The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other can be displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner Is a slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
An advantageous amount setting means for setting an advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling the player in an advantageous state over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means;
Specific control means for performing specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increase advantageous amounts and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount;
Informing means for informing the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount added by the specific control means,
The notification means includes
When the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the first information for notifying the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount in a predetermined period from the start of the game to the start of the next game Notification means;
Means for notifying a plurality of times of information that can be specified for an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount in a plurality of game periods longer than the predetermined period when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means; Second informing means for informing the information a plurality of times so that the player can identify the increased advantageous amount from the information for a plurality of times in a plurality of game periods;
A slot machine in which the first notification means notifies the increase advantageous amount when the maximum amount among the plurality of increase advantageous amounts is added as the increase advantageous amount at a higher rate than the second notification means. The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other can be displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner Is a slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
An advantageous amount setting means for setting an advantageous amount;
State control means for controlling the player in an advantageous state over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount set by the advantageous amount setting means;
Specific control means for performing specific control for determining one increase advantageous amount from a plurality of increase advantageous amounts and adding the increased advantageous amount to the advantageous amount;
Informing means for informing the player of information that can be specified for the increased advantageous amount added by the specific control means,
The notification means includes
First notification means for notifying information that the player can specify for the increased advantageous amount at one timing when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means;
Means for notifying information identifiable about an advantageous amount smaller than the increased advantageous amount at each of a plurality of timings when the increased advantageous amount is added by the specific control means, the information from each of the plurality of timings A second notification means for notifying the information so that the player can identify the increased advantageous amount,
A slot machine in which the first notification means notifies the increase advantageous amount when the maximum amount among the plurality of increase advantageous amounts is added as the increase advantageous amount at a higher rate than the second notification means.

Images